TransCore 0596465PT90 Location Monitoring Services Transmitter User Manual 412066 012 E4 SG

TransCore Location Monitoring Services Transmitter 412066 012 E4 SG

UserManual.wiki >

TransCore >

0596465PT90 User Manual HTML Version

User Manual

TransCore

8600 Jefferson Street NE

Albuquerque, New Mexico 87113

September 2016

P/N 412066-012

Encompass® 4 Reader System Guide

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Information in this document is subject to change and does not represent a commitment on the part of 

TransCore LP.

registered trademarks and are used under license. All other trademarks listed are the property of their

respective owners. Contents are subject to change. Printed in the U.S.A.

For further information, contact:

Sales Support:

Phone: (800) 923-4824

Technical Support

Phone: (505) 856-8007

www.transcore.com

For comments or questions about this document, e-mail tech.pubs@transcore.com.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

iii

WARNING TO USERS IN THE UNITED STATES

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC)

LOCATION AND MONITORING SERVICE STATEMENT

47 CFR §90.351

NOTE: The user is required to obtain a Part 90 site license from the FCC to operate this radio frequency

identification (RFID) device in the United States. The FCC ID number is FIH05964-65-PT90. Access the

FCC Web site at www.fcc.gov to obtain additional information concerning licensing requirements.

NOTE: Users in all countries should check with the appropriate local authorities for licensing

requirements.

FCC RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

47 CFR §15.105(a)

NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment

generates, uses, and can radiate RF energy and may cause harmful interference to radio communications if

not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual. Operating this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case, depending on the laws in effect, the user may be

required to correct the interference at their own expense.

NO UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATIONS

47 CFR §15.21

CAUTION: This equipment may not be modified, altered, or changed in any way without permission

from TransCore, LP. Unauthorized modification may void the equipment authorization from the FCC and

will void the TransCore warranty.

USE OF SHIELDED CABLES IS REQUIRED

47 CFR §15.27(a)

NOTE: Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to comply with FCC regulations.

TransCore, LP

USA

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

AVERTISSEMENT À L’ATTENTION DES

UTILISATEURS AUX ÉTATS-UNIS

DÉCLARATION 47 CFR §90.351 (CODE DES

RÈGLEMENTS FÉDÉRAUX) DE LA FEDERAL

COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (FCC) SUR LES

SERVICES DE LOCALISATION ET DE CONTRÔLE

REMARQUE : L’utilisateur est tenu d’obtenir une licence d’utilisation sur site Partie 90 auprès de la

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) afin de pouvoir utiliser ce dispositif RFID (radio-

identification) aux États-Unis ou au Canada. Le numéro d’identification de la FCC est FIH05964-65. Pour

obtenir de plus amples informations concernant les exigences relatives aux licences, prière de consulter le

site web de la FCC à www.fcc.gov.

REMARQUE : Il est recommandé à tous les utilisateurs, quel que soit leur pays, de consulter les autorités

locales compétentes sur les exigences de licence.

DÉCLARATION 47 CFR §15.105(A) DE LA FCC SUR

LES INTERFÉRENCES DES FRÉQUENCES RADIO

REMARQUE : Cet appareil a été testé et déclaré conforme à la catégorie d’un appareil numérique de

classe A en accord avec la partie 15 des directives de la FCC. Ces normes visent à assurer une protection

raisonnable contre les interférences nuisibles lorsque l’appareil est utilisé dans un environnement

commercial. Cet appareil génère, utilise et peut émettre de l’énergie RF et peut être à l’origine

d’interférences nuisibles aux communications radio s’il n’est pas installé et utilisé en suivant les directives

du manuel d’instructions. Si cet appareil est utilisé dans une zone résidentielle, il est probable qu’il cause

des interférences nuisibles. Dans ce cas, l’utilisateur pourrait être amené à remédier aux interférences à ses

propres frais, selon les lois du pays en vigueur.

AUCUNE MODIFICATION NON AUTORISÉE

47 CFR §15.21

MISE EN GARDE : Il est interdit de modifier, d’altérer ou d’apporter des changements à cet appareil de

quelque manière que ce soit sans autorisation. Toute modification non autorisée peut annuler l’autorisation

d’utilisation accordée par la FCC et annulera la garantie.

UTILISATION DE CÂBLES BLINDÉS ET MISE À LA TERRE

47 CFR §15.27(A)

REMARQUE : Il est recommandé d’utiliser des câbles blindés et une mise à la terre avec cet appareil afin

de répondre aux réglementations de la FCC

TRANSCORE, LP

ÉTATS-UNIS

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

WARNING TO USERS IN CANADA

INDUSTRY CANADA (IC) INDUSTRY CANADA’S RADIO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS (RSS-

137) LOCATION AND MONITORING SERVICE IN THE BAND 902-928 MHZ SECTION 2.1

NOTE: The user is required to obtain a license from Industry Canada (IC), to operate this radio frequency iden-

tification (RFID) device in Canada. The IC ID number is 1584A-0596465PT90, access the IC website at

www.ic.gc.ca to obtain additional information concerning licensing requirements.

Industry Canada (IC) Industry Canada’s Radio Standard Specifications General

Requirements (RSS-GEN) for Compliance of Radio Apparatus Statement Section 8.4

This device complies with Industry Canada’s license-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference; and

2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired

operation of the device.

AVERTISSEMENT AUX UTILISATEURS AU CANADA

INDUSTRIE CANADA (IC) INDUSTRIE CANADA RADIO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS (CNR-

137) EMPLACEMENT ET SERVICE DE SURVEILLANCE DANS LA BANDE 902-928 MHZ,

SECTION 2.1

Remarque : L’utilisateur est tenu d’obtenir une licence d’Industrie Canada (IC), afin d’exploiter

ce dispositif d’identification par radiofréquence au Canada. Le numéro d’identification d’IC est

1584A-0596465PT90. Pour obtenir de plus amples informations concernant les exigences

relatives aux licences, prière de consulter le site web de d’IC à www.ic.gc.ca .

Radio Standard Spécifications exigences générales Industrie Canada (IC) Industrie

Canada (CNR-GEN) pour s’acquitter du Radio appareil déclaration article 8.4

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio

exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes :

1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et

2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le

brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

RADIO FREQUENCY HEALTH LIMITS FOR ENCOMPASS 4 READER USING AN EXTERNAL

ANTENNA IN FREQUENCY BAND OF 902.25 TO 903.75 AND 910.00 TO 921.50 MHZ

Several agencies (OSHA, FCC, IC) have environmental guidelines regulating maximum

permissible exposure (MPE) or “safe” exposure levels that this product falls under. To ensure

that proper safety guideline for the end users of this product, i.e. Occupational (Controlled) and

General Population/ Public (Uncontrolled), the recommended levels for each of the agencies are

presented in the next sections with TransCore’s recommendations for safety in the last section.

OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

OSHA (an agency of The United States of America) legislates in the Code of Federal

Regulations (CFR) Title 29 Part 1910 Subpart G 1910.97 titled “Nonionizing radiation”, a

maximum safe exposure limit of 10 milliwatts per square centimeter (mW/cm2) during any 0.1-

hour period (i.e. 6 minutes). Using the frequency (in the middle of the band of operation of this

equipment) of 915 MHz and the highest antenna gain that this equipment is certified for use in a

final installation, the minimum safe distance was calculated to be 8in (20cm).

FCC (Federal Communication Commission)

FCC (an agency of The United States of America) legislates in the Code of Federal Regulations

(CFR) Title 47 Chapter I Subchapter A Part 1 Subpart I Section 1.1310 titled “Radiofrequency

radiation exposure limits” that the maximum permissible exposure (MPE) is the following:

Occupational/Controlled Exposure

Power density = frequency(in MHz)/300 mW/cm2 with an Averaging time of 6 Min

General Population/Uncontrolled Exposure

Power density = frequency(in MHz)/1500 mW/cm2 with an Averaging time of 30 Min

Using the frequency (in the middle of the band of operation of this equipment) of 915MHz and

the highest antenna gain that this equipment is certified for use in a final installation, the

minimum safe distance was calculated. The MPE minimum distances are 14in (36cm) for the

Occupational/Controlled environment, and 31.5in (80.5cm) for the General Population/

Uncontrolled environment.

Industry Canada (Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada)

Industry Canada (a Department of the Government of Canada) sets out the requirements in Radio Standards

Specification RSS-102, Issue 5 guidelines, recommending a maximum safe power density in W/m2. Thus, the

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

vii

maximum permissible exposure for general population/ uncontrolled exposure at 915MHz is 2.77 W/m2. The

average time is 6 minutes. The maximum permissible exposure (MPE) is the following:

Controlled Environment

Power density = 0.6455*frequency(in MHz)0.5 W/m2 with a Reference Period time of 6 Min

General Public/Uncontrolled Environment

Power density = 0.02619*frequency(in MHz)0.6834 W/m2 with a Reference Period time of 6 Min

Using the frequency (in the middle of the band of operation of this equipment) of 915MHz and

the highest antenna gain that this equipment is certified for use in a final installation, the

minimum safe distance was calculated. The MPE minimum distances are 18in (45cm) for the

Controlled environment and 47in (120cm) for the General Public/Uncontrolled environment.

TransCore Recommendation on MPE (Maximum Permissible Exposure)

The calculated power densities and MPE distance for each of the agencies respective to the

environment is shown below.

Occupational/Controlled Environment

Agency Power Density (mW/cm2)MPE minimum distance Time (min)

in cm

OSHA 10 8 20 6

FCC 3.05 14 36 6

IC 1.95 18 45 6

General Population/Public/Uncontrolled Environment

Agency Power Density (mW/cm2)MPE minimum distance Time (min)

In cm

OSHA 10 8 20 6

FCC 0.61 31.5 80 30

IC 0.28 47 120 6

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

viii

With the equipment installed and running at the maximum transmit power of 2.0W (33dBm), 0

dB transmit attenuation, using the highest gain antenna that the equipment is certified for, the

recommendation for each of the operation environments is as follows:

1. The antenna should be installed at least 47in (120cm) from the General Population/ Public

i.e. Uncontrolled Environment.

2. Maintenance personnel (i.e. Occupational/Controlled Environment) must remain at least

18in (45cm) from the antenna and limit their time in the environment to 6 minutes when

the system is operating.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

LIMITES D’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES POUR LE LECTEUR ENCOMPASS 4

UTILISANT UNE ANTENNE EXTERNE SUR LA BANDE DE FRÉQUENCES DE 902.25 À 903.75

ET DE 910.00 À 921.50 MHZ

Plusieurs organismes (OSHA, FCC, IC) publient des directives environnementales qui

recommandent des limites d’exposition maximale autorisée (normes MPE) ou des niveaux

d’exposition « sûrs » auxquels cet appareil se conforme. Pour faire en sorte que chaque

utilisateur final ait connaissance des directives de sécurité qui le concerne, que ce soit dans son

travail (accès contrôlé) ou pour la population générale/le grand public (accès non contrôlé),

TransCore présente les niveaux recommandés par chaque organisme dans ses recommandations

sécuritaires détaillées dans la dernière section.

OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

Dans le Code des réglementations fédérales (CFR), Titre 29, Partie 1910, Sous-partie G

1910.97, intitulée « Nonionizing radiation » (Rayonnements non ionisants), l’OSHA

(organisme américain) recommande un plafond d’exposition maximale de 10 milliwatts par

centimètre carré (mW/cm2) pendant une période de 0,1 heure (soit 6 minutes). En utilisant la

fréquence de 915 MHz (milieu de la bande de fréquences de cet appareil) et le gain d’antenne

maximal pour lequel cet appareil a reçu une certification d’utilisation dans une installation

finale, la distance minimale sécuritaire est de 20 cm (8 po).

FCC (Federal Communication Commission)

Dans le Code des réglementations fédérales (CFR), Titre 47, Chapitre I, Sous-chapitre A, Partie

1, Sous-partie I, Section 1.1310 intitulée « Radiofrequency radiation exposure limits » (Limites

d’exposition aux rayonnements de radiofréquence), la FCC (organisme américain) établit les

limites d’exposition maximale autorisée (normes MPE) comme suit :

Exposition professionnelle/contrôlée

Densité de puissance = fréquence (en MHz)/300 mW/cm2 avec une durée moyenne de 6 min.

Exposition de la population générale/non contrôlée

Densité de puissance = fréquence (en MHz)/1500 mW/cm2 avec une durée moyenne de 30 min.

En utilisant la fréquence de 915 MHz (milieu de la bande de fréquences de cet appareil) et le gain d’antenne

maximal pour lequel cet appareil a reçu une certification d’utilisation dans une installation finale, la distance

minimale sécuritaire est la suivante : les distances MPE minimales sont de 36 cm (14 po) pour

l’environnement professionnel/contrôlé et de 80,5 cm (31,5 po) pour la population générale/environnement

non contrôlé.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Industrie Canada (Innovation, Sciences et Développement économique Canada)

Le Cahier des charges sur les normes radioélectriques 102, 5e édition, d’Industrie Canada (un

ministère du Gouvernement du Canada) établit des recommandations pour une densité de

puissance maximale sécuritaire en W/m2. Ainsi, l’exposition maximale admissible pour la

population générale/non contrôlée à 915 MHz est calculée à 2,77 W/m2. La durée moyenne est

de 6 minutes. Les limites d’exposition maximale autorisée (normes MPE) sont les suivantes :

Environnement contrôlé

Densité de puissance = 0,6455*fréquence (en MHz)0,5 W/m2 avec une durée de référence de 6

min.

Grand public/environnement non contrôlé

Densité de puissance = 0,02619*fréquence (en MHz)0,6834 W/m2 avec une durée de référence de 6

min.

En utilisant la fréquence de 915 MHz (milieu de la bande de fréquences de cet appareil) et le

gain d’antenne maximal pour lequel cet appareil a reçu une certification d’utilisation dans une

installation finale, la distance minimale sécuritaire est la suivante : les distances MPE minimales

sont de 45 cm (18 po) pour l’environnement professionnel/contrôlé et de 120 cm (47 po) pour le

grand public/environnement non contrôlé.

Recommandations de TransCore sur les limites d’exposition maximale autorisée (normes

MPE)

Les densités de puissance et la distance MPE calculées par chaque organisme pour un

environnement donné sont présentées ci-dessous.

Exposition professionnelle/environnement contrôlé

Organisme Densité de puissance

(mW/cm2)

Distance MPE minimale Durée (en min.)

po cm

OSHA 10 8 20 6

FCC 3,05 14 36 6

IC 1,95 18 45 6

Population générale/environnement non contrôlé

Organisme Densité de puissance (mW/cm2)Distance MPE minimale Durée (en min.)

po cm

OSHA 10 8 20 6

FCC 0,61 31,5 80 30

IC 0,28 47 120 6

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xi Avec l’appareil installé et fonctionnant à la puissance de transmission maximale de 2,0 W

(33 dBm), 0 dB d’atténuation de transmission, et en utilisant le gain d’antenne maximal pour

lequel l’appareil a reçu une certification, les recommandations pour chaque environnement

d’exploitation sont les suivantes :

1. L’antenne devrait être installée à au moins 120 cm (47 po) de la population générale/du grand

public, c’est-à-dire d’un environnement non contrôlé.

2. Le personnel d’entretien (c’est-à-dire dans un environnement professionnel/contrôlé) doit

rester à au moins 45 cm (18 po) de l’antenne et limiter son temps d’exposition à 6 minutes

lorsque l’appareil est en fonctionnement.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xii

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xiii

Summary of Revisions to Encompass 4 Reader System

Guide

Version

Number Date

Revised Summary of Changes

N/A 10/08 Entry for baseline

-002 03/09 Corrected Command #524, technical support phone number, and added grounding

text and graphic to chapter 4.

-003 04/09 Revised Chapter 4 graphics, procedure steps, and caution statements to show

grounding wire (12-14 AWG) and earth ground.

Deleted references to command #6402 because it is factory use only.

-004 09/09 Added multiple commands to reader guide. Added instructions for discharging

voltage from antenna before connecting it to the reader

-005 06/10 Updated patent statement and copyright boilerplate

-006 07/10 Minor updates and cover page changed to June 2010. No other changes.

-007 02/11 Added notes regarding power cycling and #00 command. Deleted #06, #43, #6160,

and #6161 commands per engineer request. Updated Sales Support and Technical

Support phone and fax numbers

-008 04/11 Corrected RS-232 interface signal wiring references in Table 4-4 and Table 4-6.

Chapter 6, added Data Inquiry Protocol information. Change to Host Transmission

section, page 6-8, “Upon receiving a host command, the E4 Reader replies using

the command’s sequence number in its response.” Original E4 text was “Upon

receiving a host command, the E4 Reader echoes the command’s sequence

number in its response.” Multiple changes to Chapter 7, Commands:

#410N: deleted “(different from Item …)” text, deleted note regarding firmware

version

#524: deleted note that discussed appending time and date to ID codes, etc.

#525: added P2 field indicating data inquiry protocol enabled

#535: deleted

#536: deleted

#570: added TMM0 field

Appendix D updated to reflect command changes

-009 01/12 Updated TransCore Technical Support phone number

-010 04/12 Added 35- and 45-foot connector cable harness information to Table 2-2. Revised

Table 2-3 Power Requirements to match material presented by TransCore

Technical Support in Web seminar. Updated Table 2-4 to show additional connector

cable harnesses

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xiv

-011 12/13 Added two cable extension notes on pages 2-19, 2-20. Added notes and diagrams

on page 4-29, 4-31. Added info about E4 Sense Output description in Chapter 4.

-012 9/16 Update Health and Safety Information

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

vii

Summary of Revisions to Encompass 4 Reader System Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-xiii

1 Introduction

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

System Guide Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

How It Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Licensing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

2 Developing the Site Plan

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Reading of Mixed Population Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Reader and Tag Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Unobstructed Line of Sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Antenna Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

AA3100 Yagi (without radome) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

AA3101 Yagi (with radome) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3110 Parapanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3140 PCB Log Periodic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

AA3153 Toll Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Antenna and Tag Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Unobstructed Line of Sight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Site Layout and Traffic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

The Encompass 4 Reader Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Other Encompass 4 Readers in the Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Lane Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

viii

Gate with Center Island Configuration 2-14

Parking Garage with Ticket Island Configuration 2-15

Overhead Reader Installation Configuration 2-15

Lane Configurations for Encompass 4 Readers Using an External Antenna . . . 2-16

Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Existing Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Electrical and Communications Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Junction Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Power and Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Electrical Power 2-18

Host Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

RS–232 Interface 2-21

RS–422 Interface 2-21

Wiegand Interface 2-21

Input/Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

External Antenna Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

3 Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

Compatible Tag Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Reader and Tag Model Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

TransCore’s eGo Plus Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

eGo Plus Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

eGo Plus License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

TransCore’s eGo Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

eGo License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Installing eGo Plus Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Mirror Post Attached on Windshield 3-8

Mirror Post Attached on Header 3-8

Large Truck with No Inside Mirror 3-9

eGo Plus Sticker Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Removing eGo Plus Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Installing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Removing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Positioning eGo Plus License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

eGo Plus LPT Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Installing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Mirror Post Attached Low On Windshield 3-16

Mirror Post Attached High on Windshield 3-16

Mirror Post Attached to Headliner 3-17

Mounting the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Installing eGo LPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Installing Interior ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Positioning ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Interior Driver’s or Passenger’s Side 3-19

Interior Center Windshield 3-19

ATA Interior Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Removing Interior ATA Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Installing ATA License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Positioning ATA License Plate Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

ATA License Plate Tag Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Types of Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Alternate Mounting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Installation Procedures Using Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Installation Procedures Using Blind Rivets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Removing Exterior Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

4 Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Installation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Materials Supplied by TransCore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Contents of Shipping Carton 4-3

Installation Accessory Options 4-4

Additional Materials Needed for Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Pre-installation Testing of the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Discharging Voltage from the External Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Required Equipment 4-6

Discharging the Voltage 4-6

Connecting the External Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Connecting the AC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Connecting the DC Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Connecting Communications for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Required Materials 4-10

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–232 Interface 4-11

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface 4-13

Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader on a Round Pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Required Materials To Be Supplied by Customer 4-15

Procedures 4-15

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader to a Wall or Flat Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Required Materials 4-19

Procedures 4-19

Mounting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Discharging Voltage from the External Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Required Equipment 4-23

Discharging the Voltage 4-23

Mounting the Antenna Curb-Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Procedures 4-25

Mounting the Antenna Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27

Procedures 4-27

Connecting the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Reader Cable Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Connecting Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader to the PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

RS–232 Interface 4-29

RS–422 Interface 4-32

Wiegand Interface 4-33

Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Sense Input Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Sense Output Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

Marking the Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38

Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

5 General Software Information

Command Entry Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Command Response Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Operating Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Power Fail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Program Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Download Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Download Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Sign-On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Boot Failure Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Tag/Message Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

6 Communications Protocols

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Basic Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Error Correcting Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Data Inquiry Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Basic Protocol and ECP Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Reader Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

ECP Host ACK/NAK Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Switch to Command Mode Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Host Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Reader Command Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Sample Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10

Reader Transmissions 6-10

Host Command Transmissions 6-11

Timing and Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

Reader-Addressed Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Illegal Sequence Number (not in the range 0–9, A–F) 6-13

Wrong Sequence Number 6-13

Incorrect CRC 6-13

Illegal Command 6-13

Transmission Timeout 6-15

Receive Timeout 6-15

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xii

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision 6-15

Host-Addressed Failure Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15

Illegal or Wrong Sequence Number 6-15

Incorrect CRC 6-15

Transmission Timeout 6-15

Receive Timeout 6-15

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision 6-15

ECP Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

CRC Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Manually Disabling ECP for Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

7 Commands

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Download Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Reader Mode Control — Command Group 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

00 Switch to Data Mode (Factory Default) 7-5

01 Switch to Command Mode 7-5

Communications Port Control — Command Group 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

100N Select Baud Rate 7-6

101N Select Stop Bits 7-6

102N Select Parity 7-7

Command Group 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

20 Set Time 7-7

21 Set Date 7-8

22 Display Time and Date 7-8

Append Information — Command Group 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

30N Append Time and Date Selection 7-8

31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection 7-9

#320 Disable EAC Page Append (Factory Default) 7-10

#321 Enable EAC Page Append 7-10

ID Filtering — Command Group 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

40 Transmit All ID Codes 7-11

410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature) 7-11

420N Select Valid ID Code Criteria 7-12

440 Reset Uniqueness 7-12

44N Set Uniqueness Timeout 7-12

450 Disable Wiegand Mode (Factory Default) 7-13

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xiii

451 Enable Wiegand Mode 7-13

452 Disable Tag Translation Mode (Factory Default) 7-13

453 Enable Tag Translation Mode 7-13

454 Disable Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default) 7-14

455 Enable Multi-tag Sort 7-14

456 Enable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default) 7-14

457 Disable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort 7-14

458 Disable Second Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) 7-15

459 Enable Second Alternate Group Select 7-15

46NN Set Wiegand Retransmit Interval 7-16

480 Disable ATA 7-16

481 Enable ATA 7-16

482 Disable eGo 7-16

483 Enable eGo 7-16

484 Disable SeGo 7-16

485 Enable SeGo 7-16

486 Disable IAG 7-16

487 Enable IAG 7-16

488 Disable eATA 7-16

489 Enable eATA 7-17

490 Disable Third Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) 7-17

491 Enable Third Alternate Group Select 7-17

492 Disable Fourth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) 7-17

493 Enable Fourth Alternate Group Select 7-17

494 Disable Fifth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) 7-17

495 Enable Fifth Alternate Group Select 7-18

496 Disable Alternate Group Select (Factory Default) 7-18

497 Enable Alternate Group Select 7-18

Reader Status — Command Group 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

505 Display Software Version 7-18

506 Display Hardware Configuration Information 7-19

510 Display RF Transceiver FPGA Version 7-19

511 Display RF Transceiver I Filter Chip Version 7-19

512 Display RF Transceiver Q Filter Chip Version 7-19

513 Display DSP Board Actel Version 7-19

520 Display Power Fail Bit 7-19

521 Display Reader ID Number 7-19

522 Display Communications Port Parameters 7-20

524 Display Appended Information Status 7-20

525 Display Communications Protocol Status 7-21

526 Display I/O Status 7-22

527 Display RF Status 7-24

529 Display Presence Input Status 7-25

530 Display RF0 Filter Status 7-27

532 Display Wiegand Mode Status 7-28

533 Display Wiegand Retransmit Interval 7-28

534 Display Tag Translation Mode Status 7-28

537 Display Echo Status 7-28

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xiv

540 Display Flash Checksum 7-29

543 Display Boot Checksum 7-29

549 Display User-Programmable Group Select Equals (GSE) Filter Data 7-29

560 Request Sensor Status Change 7-29

570 Display Tag Protocols 7-30

577 Report Buffered Handshakes 7-30

#582 Display Synchronization Values 7-30

Reader Control Functions — Command Group 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

60NN Set Reader ID Number 7-31

610 Select Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default) 7-31

611 Select Error Correcting Protocol 7-31

612NN Select Error Correcting Protocol Timeout 7-31

613 Enable Data Inquiry Protocol 7-32

614N Select Flow Control Option 7-32

6170 Disable Echo Mode 7-33

6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default) 7-33

620N Set Output Control 7-33

621 Select Predefined Output Control (Factory Default) 7-34

63 Reset Reader 7-34

640N RF Control 7-34

641 Select RF-by-Input Control (Factory Default) 7-35

642NN Select RF Operating Frequency 7-35

643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance) 7-38

644NN Set RF Attenuation 7-38

645NN Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range (Distance) 7-38

646XX Set IAG RF Attenuation 7-39

647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency 7-39

#648NN Set Synchronization Output Delay Time 7-40

#649NN Set Synchronization Hold Off Time 7-41

65 Reset Power Fail Bit 7-42

66F Load Default Operating Parameters 7-42

67N Set Output Pulse Duration 7-42

690N Select Presence Without Tag Report Option 7-44

692N Select RF Control Algorithm 7-45

693N Select RF Timeout Period 7-45

694N Select Input Inversion Option 7-46

695S...S Set Serial Number 7-47

696S...S Store Hardware Configuration String 7-47

697 Set User-Programmable Group Select Equals (GSE) Filter 7-49

Auxiliary Reader Control — Command Group 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

82N Select Input Status Change Report Option 7-50

830 Disable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report (Factory Default) 7-50

831 Enable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report 7-50

8 Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Configuring the Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

General Configuration Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Default Operating Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Configuring Parameters with Terminal Emulation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Starting the Terminal Emulation Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Verifying Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Verifying Tag Read Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Configuring Encompass 4 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Appended Tag Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

ID Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Reset Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Radio Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

RF Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Vehicle Detector Controlling RF Transmission 8-16

Host Controlling RF Transmission 8-16

Continuous RF Transmission 8-16

Sense Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Sense Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Serial Port Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Port Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Communications Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Software Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader 8-20

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader Antenna 8-20

Fine-Tuning the Read Zone by Lowering Output Power 8-20

Fine-tuning the Read Zone by Adjusting Sensitivity Range 8-21

9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Encompass 4 Reader Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Marketing Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Find a Problem with the Encompass 4 Reader or Have Suggestions? . . . . . . . 9-7

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xvi

A Glossary

B Technical Specifications

Reader Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

Communications B-3

Hardware Features B-3

Power Requirements B-3

Physical Attributes B-3

Environmental Parameters B-4

Options B-4

C Wiring Tables

Communications Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Cable Supplied with the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4

RS–232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5

RS–422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6

Wiegand Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

Power Supply Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7

AC Power C-7

Low-Voltage DC Power C-9

Input/Output Cabling Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10

Summary Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-14

D Command Quick Reference

Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3

Numerical Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5

Alphabetical Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17

E Compatible Tag Information

Tag Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3

Tag Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xix

Figure 1-1 Encompass 4 Reader System Front and Side Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Figure 2-1 Tag and Reader Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Figure 2-2 Encompass 4 Reader Location Relative to Tag Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Figure 2-3 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Driver’s Side Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Figure 2-4 Typical Tag Positions for U.S. Passenger’s Side Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Figure 2-5 Typical Tag Positions Used with Overhead Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Figure 2-6 Gate Application with Center Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Figure 2-7 Parking Garage Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Figure 2-8 Overhead Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Figure 3-1 eGo Plus Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-2 eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Figure 3-3 eGo Plus License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Figure 3-4 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-5 eGo License Plate Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Figure 3-6 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Figure 3-7 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-8 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement in Large Truck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Figure 3-9 Applying eGo Plus Sticker Tag to Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Figure 3-10 Second Step of eGo Plus Sticker Tag Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Figure 3-11 Applying eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag to Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-12 Second Step of eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Figure 3-13 Correct Mounting Location for LPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-14 Correct Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-15 Upper Placement Over the Top Area of the License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

Figure 3-16 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Figure 3-17 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-18 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Figure 3-19 Driver’s or Passenger’s Side (U.S.) Interior Windshield Tag Location . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Figure 3-20 Upper Center Interior Windshield Tag Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Figure 3-21 Hook-and-Loop Material on Interior Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Figure 3-22 Proper Tag Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Figure 3-23 Correct Exterior Tag Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Figure 3-24 Upper Placement In License Plate Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Figure 3-25 Obstruction-Free Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Figure 3-26 Spacer Positioned Behind Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Figure 3-27 Exterior Tag with Double-Sided Tape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Figure 4-1 Wiring for Audible Circuit Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Figure 4-2 Connect RF N-type Load or Attenuator to Reader Cable End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Figure 4-3 Short Load to Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

Figure 4-4 Back of Encompass 4 Reader Showing Antenna Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Figure 4-5 Pin Assignments for Signal to Host Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Figure 4-6 Back of the Encompass 4 Reader (reader shown has integrated antenna) . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-7 Factory-Mounted Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-8 Pole-Mount Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Figure 4-9 The Encompass 4 Reader Attached to the Pole Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Figure 4-10 Front and Top Views of the Encompass 4 Reader Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Figure 4-11 Wall Mount Bracket Accessory (part number 54-1620-001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Figure 4-12 Wall Mount Bracket Attached to the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Figure 4-13 Factory-Mounted Bracket Attached to Wall Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Figure 4-14 Pole Mount Bracket Attached to Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Figure 4-15 Connecting the Encompass 4 Assembly to Pole Mount Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

Figure 4-16 Connect RF N-type Load or Attenuator to Reader Cable End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Figure 4-17 Short Load to Earth Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24

Figure 4-18 Front and Top Views of the Curb-Side Antenna Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26

Figure 4-19 Encompass 4 Reader Installation with Overhead Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

Figure 4-20 Recommended Reader Cable Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28

Figure 4-21 RS-232 Cable Extension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32

Figure 4-22 Wiegand Cable Extension Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34

Figure 4-23 Sample Circuit Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35

Figure 4-24 Sample Circuit Connections for IAG Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36

Figure 4-25 Sample Read Zone Marking Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41

Figure 7-1 Example of Synchronization Bus Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41

Figure 8-1 Connection Description Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Figure 8-2 Phone Number Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Figure 8-3 COM 1 Properties Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7

Figure 8-4 Hyper Terminal Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8

Figure 8-5 Sign-on Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9

Figure 8-6 Successful Tag Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Figure 8-7 Second Successful Tag Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Figure 8-8 Encompass 4 Reader RF Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Figure C-1 DB9 and DB25 Connector Pin Assignments for Signal to Host. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xxi

Table 1-1 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Table 2-1 Examples of Staggered Reader Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Table 2-2 Connector Cabling Accessory Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Table 2-3 Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Table 2-4 Recommended Cable Length from Transformer to the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . 2-19

Table 2-5 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Table 2-6 Reader to Antenna Cable Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Table 3-1 Tags Read by the Encompass 4 Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Table 3-2 eGo Plus Tag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Table 3-3 eGo Tag Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Table 4-1 Installation Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

Table 4-2 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Table 4-3 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for the Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Table 4-4 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Table 4-5 Commands for Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Table 4-6 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Table 4-7 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Table 4-8 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Table 4-9 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Table 5-2 Sample Command Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Table 7-1 Select Baud Rate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Table 7-2 Select Stop Bits Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Table 7-3 Select Parity Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Table 7-4 Append Time and Date Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Table 7-5 Append Auxiliary Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Table 7-6 Unique ID Code Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Table 7-7 Select Valid Code Commands and Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Table 7-8 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Table 7-9 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status (IAG Applications) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Table 7-10 Open/Closed Conditions for Input Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Table 7-11 Flow Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Table 7-12 Output Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Table 7-13 RF Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Table 7-14 RF Frequency Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Table 7-15 RF Attenuation Command Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Table 7-16 Select RF Operating Frequency Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39

Table 7-17 Example of Encompass 4 Reader Plaza Synchronization Bus Settings . . . . . . . . 7-42

Table 7-18 Output Pulse Duration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43

Table 7-19 Presence Without Tag Report Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Table 7-20 RF Control Algorithm Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45

Table 7-21 Timeout Period Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46

Table 7-22 Input Inversion Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Table 7-23 Input Status Change Report Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50

Table 8-1 Encompass 4 Reader Configuration Label Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Table 8-2 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Table 8-3 Command Sequence to Verify Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Table 9-1 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Table C-1 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Table C-2 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

xxii

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Table C-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Table C-6 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Table C-7 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Table C-9 AC Transformer Connections for Alternate Wire Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Table C-10 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Table C-11 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . 10

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable. . . . . 14

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Table E-1 SeGo Protocol Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Table E-2 eGo Protocol Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

-1

Introduction

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Introduction

1-3

Chapter 1

Introduction

This chapter is the introduction to this manual and provides information

pertaining to the audience, organization, document conventions, system

description, and license information for the Encompass® 4 Reader

System.

Purpose

This guide provides site planning and testing, installing, and operating instructions for

TransCore’s Encompass 4 Reader System, a dual-protocol reader that reads TransCore

Super eGo® (SeGo), Intellitag®-based eGo, American Trucking Associations (ATA)/

International Organization for Standardization (ISO), and Inter-Agency Group (IAG)

tag protocols. Before you begin installing the Encompass 4 Reader System, TransCore

recommends that you read this entire manual.

Audience

This document is intended to be used by authorized TransCore Encompass 4 Reader

System dealers, installers, and service personnel. Because the Encompass 4 Reader

System has no operator- or end-user serviceable components or features, no end-user

manual or operator guide exists. Once the system is set up and tested by the

authorized installer, Encompass 4 Reader System operation requires no end-user

intervention.

System Guide Organization

Note: TransCore offers the Encompass 4 Reader in two models: one with an inte-

grated antenna and one that requires connection to an external antenna. In this system

guide, information and instructions for both Encompass 4 Reader models are pre-

sented. Where separate instructions dictate, a section detailing one Encompass 4

Reader model is followed immediately with a section detailing the other reader model.

In this system guide, the reader with an integrated antenna is listed first. In cases

where the information does not warrant a separate section, the addition of "...or

antenna" distinguishes between the Encompass 4 Reader models.

The chapters of this guide and a description of the contents are listed here.

•Chapter 1, “Introduction,” explains the purpose and describes the audience for the

guide, outlines the manual’s organization, provides a brief description of the

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

1-4

Encompass 4 Reader system, and discusses Federal Communications Commis-

sion (FCC) licensing requirements.

•Chapter 2, “Developing the Site Plan,” discusses factors to be considered when

developing the site plan and before ordering equipment and installing the Encom-

pass 4 Reader System. These considerations include reader or antenna and tag

alignment, site layout and traffic flow, and electrical and communications require-

ments.

•Chapter 3, “Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags,” contains information on

compatible tag models and provides procedures for installing tags onto, and

removing tags from, vehicles that use the facility where the Encompass 4 Reader

System is installed.

•Chapter 4, “Installing the Encompass 4 Reader System,” lists the materials needed

and provides procedures to install the Encompass 4 Reader System. Steps include:

• Pre-testing

• Installing the Encompass 4 Reader System on a round pole or flat surface

• Connecting power and communications

• Marking the read zone.

•Chapter 5, “General Software Information,” and Chapter 6, “Communications

Protocols,” provide reference information on various software-related topics and

communications protocols.

•Chapter 7, “Commands,” discusses the host-transmitted commands that are used

to control Encompass 4 Reader System configuration and operation.

•Chapter 8, “Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader System,” provides procedures

for configuring and fine-tuning the Encompass 4 Reader System after installing it

at the site.

•Chapter 9, “Troubleshooting and Maintenance,” answers the most commonly

asked questions about installing and maintaining the Encompass 4 Reader Sys-

tem.

•Appendix A, “Glossary,” contains frequently used terms.

•Appendix B, “Technical Specifications,” provides the Encompass 4 Reader Sys-

tem specifications.

•Appendix C, “Wiring Tables,” shows the wiring connections for the communica-

tions interfaces, electrical cable connections, and the external interface signal wir-

ing.

•Appendix D, “Command Quick Reference,” lists the Encompass 4 Reader System

factory default configuration settings and provides host software commands in

numerical and alphabetical order.

•Appendix E, “Compatible Tag Information,” provides helpful information about

Introduction

1-5

tags that are compatible with the Encompass 4 Reader System.

•Index provides an alphabetical listing of guide topics.

Typographical Conventions

The conventions listed in Table 1-1 are used in this manual:

Table 1-1 Typographical Conventions

Convention Indication

Concerns about a procedure.

Code Code, including keywords and variables within text and as

separate paragraphs, and user-defined program elements

within text appear in courier typeface.

Dialog Box Title Title of a dialog box as it appears on screen.

Menu Item Appears on a menu. Capitalization follows the interface.

Note Auxiliary information that further clarifies the current

discussion. These important points require the user’s

attention. The paragraph is in italics and the word Note is

bold.

NUL Zero-value ASCII character or a zero-value byte.

NULL Zero-value pointers. Null-terminated string refers to strings

of printable ASCII characters with a zero-value byte placed

in memory directly after the last printable character of the

string.

This procedure might cause harm to the equipment and/or

the user.

System Description

The Encompass 4 Reader System is a dual-protocol reader supporting the low-cost,

high-performance SeGo radio frequency identification (RFID) technology. SeGo tech-

nology provides the capability to read miniature RFID tags in a myriad of options

including rugged, durable, or thin flexible forms such as the eGo Plus Sticker Tag. The

Encompass 4 Reader System also supports legacy transportation applications such as

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

1-6

gated toll, parking, or security gate access and is designed to be compatible with exist-

ing TransCore SmartPass® parking access control applications certified for licensed

use. The Encompass 4 Reader System also supports the TransCore eGo and TransCore

ATA/ISO tag types, as well as the IAG tag protocol.

The Encompass 4 Reader System is a high-power unit that can read both half-frame

and full-frame tags. The reader output power can be adjusted using reader commands.

Reader

The Encompass 4 Reader System consists of an input/output (I/O) module, a power

supply, a reader logic board (also called a tag decoder), a radio frequency (RF) trans-

mitter/receiver (called the RF module), and a patch antenna.

A second version of the Encompass 4 Reader is designed to be used with a high-per-

formance external antenna. These Encompass 4 Reader System components are con-

tained in a highly reliable, compact, and easy-to-install environmentally-sealed

package. Figure 1-1 shows the front and side views of an Encompass 4 Reader Sys-

tem.

Figure 1-1 Encompass 4 Reader System Front and Side Views

Tags

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-3

Chapter 3

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

This chapter describes the various tag types compatible with the

Encompass® 4 Reader and the procedures for installing and removing

compatible internal and external tags.

Compatible Tag Types

The Encompass 4 Reader provides the capability to read the various TransCore eGo®

Plus-type tags employing Super eGo (SeGo) protocol and eGo-style tags and other

American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANS INCITS 256-2001-compliant tags

with Intellitag technology. Depending on options ordered, the Encompass 4 Reader

can read eGo Plus and eGo tags as well as TransCore IT2000 (in optional ATA/ISO

mode), ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant tags, and Inter-Agency (IAG) tags. It can also

read tags formatted to a wide range of industry-standard proprietary formats, includ-

ing SIA Wiegand 26-bit standard format.

See Appendix E for information about the numerous tag models.

Reader and Tag Model Interoperability

Table 3-1 lists the tags that are read by the Encompass 4 Reader. See

www.transcore.com/pdf/Tag-Reader-Matrix.pdf for most current information con-

cerning readers and supported tag protocols.

Table 3-1 Tags Read by the Encompass 4 Reader

Reader Beam Tags Battery Tags

Encompass 4 Reader eGo Plus Sticker Tag*; eGo Plus

Security Sticker Tag*, eGo Plus

License Plate Tag*

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag;

eGo Tamper Resistant Tag; eGo

License Plate Tag

other ANS INCITS 256-2001-

compliant tags with Intellitag

technology

AT5100; AT5102; AT5110;

AT5112; AT5125; AT5145;

AT5146; AT5715

AT5105; AT5114; AT5140;

AT5147; AT5510; AT5540;

AT5541; AT5542; AT5543;

AT5544; AT5545; AT5547;

AT5704; AT5707; IT2221**;

IT2235**

* in SeGo, eGo, and/or ATA

modes ** When used in optional ATA/ISO

mode

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-4

TransCore’s eGo Plus Tags

TransCore’s eGo Plus tags are offered to complete your Encompass 4 Reader System.

Table 3-2 lists some of the features of the TransCore eGo Plus tags.

Table 3-2

Tag Part

Number Used For Special

Features Power

Source

Number

of 6-bit

ASCII

Characters

Number

of 128-

Bit

Frames

Number

Wiegand

Bits

Sticker Tag 13-07xx-

nnn#

Toll,

Electronic

vehicle

registration

(EVR),

Parking,

Security

access

Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination

Beam

20 1N/A

10 1/2 26 to 54

Security

Sticker Tag 13-07xy-

zzz##

Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination,

tamper

detection

20 1N/A

10 1/2 26 to 54

License

Plate Tag

(LPT)

13-0700-

90x###

Water-

resistant,

exterior-

mounted

20 1N/A

10 1/2 26 to 54

# the first "x" in the sticker tag listing defines which protocol is dominant (e.g., ATA or eGo/SeGo) in the tag;

the second "x" further defines other active protocol configurations; and "nnn" is a unique identifier that

differentiates between tags that are programmed similarly but that have different graphics or labels).

##the "x" in the security sticker tag listing defines which protocol is dominant (e.g., ATA or eGo/SeGo) in the

tag; the "y" further defines other active protocol configurations; and "zzz" is a unique identifier that

differentiates between tags that are programmed similarly but that have different graphics or labels)

### the "x" in the LPT listing determines whether the LPT is a standard eGo Plus LPT or a motorcycle

version.

eGo Plus Tag Features

eGo Plus Sticker Tag

The Encompass 4 Reader reads the eGo Plus Sticker Tag (Figure 3-1) configured to

support SeGo mode.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-5

Figure 3-1 eGo Plus Windshield Sticker Tag

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag

The Encompass 4 Reader reads the eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag (Figure 3-2) config-

ured to support SeGo mode.

Figure 3-2 eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag

eGo Plus License Plate Tag

The eGo Plus LPT (Figure 3-3) is a water-resistant tag used in applications requiring

an exterior-mounted tag.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-6

Figure 3-3 eGo Plus License Plate Tag

TransCore’s eGo Tags

TransCore’s various eGo tags are offered to complete your Encompass 4 Reader Sys-

tem. Table 3-3 lists some of the features of the TransCore eGo tags.

Table 3-3

Tag Part

Number Used For Special

Features Power

Source

Number

of 6-bit

ASCII

Characters

Number

of 128-

Bit

Frames

Number

Wiegand

Bits

Windshield

Sticker Tag 13-0510-

004

Toll,

Electronic

vehicle

registration

(EVR),

Parking,

Security

access

Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination Beam

20 1NA

10 1/2 26 to 54

License

Plate Tag 13-0510-

900

Water-

resistant,

exterior-

mounted

20 1NA

10 1/2 26 to 54

eGo Tag Features

eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

The TransCore eGo WST (Figure 3-4) is offered to complete your Encompass 4

Reader System. It is a flexible sticker much like a vehicle registration sticker.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-7

Figure 3-4 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

eGo License Plate Tag

The eGo LPT (Figure 3-5) is a water-resistant tag used in applications requiring an

exterior-mounted tag.

Figure 3-5 eGo License Plate Tag

Installing eGo Plus Sticker Tags

eGo Plus Sticker Tags are designed to be attached by a semi-permanent adhesive to

the interior surface of nonmetallic windshields 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84

mm) in thickness. For optimum performance, you must install the tag at least 2 inches

(5 cm) from the metal in the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9 cm) from the rear-

view mirror support post. Detailed instructions for installing the eGo® Plus Sticker

Tag are found in the pocket guide “Quick and Easy Installation Instructions for the

eGo® Plus Sticker Tag.”

Some vehicles have a tinted area across the top of the windshield. If the tint is conduc-

tive, it can interfere with reading the tag. If a windshield has this conductive tint, the

tag must be installed at least 2 inches (5 cm) below this tinted area.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-8

Some vehicle windshields contain a metallic treatment that could prevent an interior

windshield-mounted tag from being read. However, many of these metallized wind-

shields have areas that are not metallized. On a vehicle without open areas in its met-

allized windshield, you might need to install an Encompass 4 Reader-compatible LPT

on the vehicle. See the section “Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags” on page 3-13.

Contact TransCore for more information. See the section “Technical Support” on page

9-7.

Required Materials

You need the following supplies to install an eGo Plus Sticker Tag:

•Glass cleaner, mild detergent and water, or any cleaning solution appropriate for

your windshield

•Clean, dry cloth

•eGo Plus Sticker Tag

Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags

TransCore designed the eGo Plus Sticker Tag to be installed on the upper center or

upper corner portion of the windshield. Figure 3-6, Figure 3-7, and Figure 3-8 illus-

trate possible upper center tag placement locations. If the upper portion of the

windshield is tinted with an aftermarket conductive tint, use placement shown in

Figure 3-7.

Mirror Post Attached on Windshield

Choose this placement option as shown in Figure 3-6 if the mirror post is attached on

the windshield.

Figure 3-6 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement

Mirror Post Attached on Header

Choose this placement option if the mirror post is attached on the header as shown in

Figure 3-7 or if the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with a conductive tint.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-9

Figure 3-7 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement

Large Truck with No Inside Mirror

Choose this option for a large truck that uses exterior mirrors only (Figure 3-8).

Figure 3-8 eGo Plus Sticker Tag Placement in Large Truck

eGo Plus Sticker Tag Installation Procedures

Caution

Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The sticker tag may not

adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

To install the eGo Plus Sticker Tag

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement

guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags” on page 3-8.

2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the

rearview mirror where the tag will be located.

3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

4. Remove the backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-10

Caution

Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the

sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges (Figure 3-9), position the tag in the correct

area of the windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented

horizontally and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75

inch (1.9 cm) from the mirror post.

Figure 3-9 Applying eGo Plus Sticker Tag to Windshield

6. Press the sticker tag firmly against the glass and gently rub over the entire tag

surface. Ensure that no air bubbles remain between the sticker tag and the

windshield (Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10 Second Step of eGo Plus Sticker Tag Application

Removing eGo Plus Sticker Tags

Peel the eGo Plus Sticker Tags from the windshield and clean any reside using isopro-

pyl alcohol or commercial glass cleaner. The tag is inoperable once removed.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-11

Installing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags

An eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag is located in the same area on the windshield as the

eGo Plus Sticker Tags. See “Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags” on page 3-8 for this

information. The eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag is slightly less flexible than the eGo

Plus Sticker Tag so the installation instructions differ. Detailed instructions for install-

ing the eGo® Plus Security Sticker Tag are found in the pocket guide “Quick and Easy

Installation Instructions for the eGo® Plus Security Sticker Tag.”

eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Installation Procedures

Caution

Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The security sticker tag

may not adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

To install the eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement

guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Plus Sticker Tags” on page 3-8.

2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the

rearview mirror where the tag will be located.

3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

4. Remove the backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

Caution

Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the

security sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the

tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges (Figure 3-11), position the tag in the correct

area of the windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented

horizontally and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75

inch (1.9 cm) from the mirror post.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-12

Figure 3-11 Applying eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag to Windshield

6. Press the security sticker tag firmly against the glass. Gently rub over the entire

tag surface removing as much air from underneath the tag (Figure 3-12). The

security sticker tag’s rigid case may prevent you from forcing out all of the air

trapped between the tag and windshield. A minimal amount of air will not affect

tag performance.

Figure 3-12 Second Step of eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag Application

Removing eGo Plus Security Sticker Tags

Locate the tapered edge under the lower right corner of the eGo Plus Security Sticker

Tags and carefully pull the tag from the windshield. If you cannot lift the tag using

your fingers, insert a plastic scraper underneath the corner and lift the tag. Once you

have removed the tag from the windshield, clean any reside using isopropyl alcohol or

commercial glass cleaner. The tag is destroyed upon removal and cannot be reused.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-13

Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags

Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows absorb the RF energy

emitted by the Encompass 4 Reader, thus causing tags to be misread. You must use

exterior LPTs on vehicles with metallized coatings on their windshields and windows.

Use license plate installation techniques to install tags on the exterior of vehicles that

have this type of window coating.

Note: The read zone of an overhead Encompass 4 Reader should be adjusted accord-

ingly when an exterior tag is installed on a license plate, or the read zone will be

reduced.

Required Materials

•Screwdriver (flat-blade or Phillips depending on the vehicle’s license plate

mounting screws)

•Optional TransCore Exterior Tag Accessory Kit (19077-01). This kit contains

tamper-resistant mounting screws and wrench.

•eGo Plus LPT

Positioning eGo Plus License Plate Tags

The eGo Plus LPT is installed over the license plate at the upper part of the vehicle’s

front license plate area.

Note: If your state does not require a front license plate, install the LPT in the area

where the license plate would normally be mounted. If your vehicle does not have a

front license plate area, contact your tag agency for other tag options.

The orientation of the tag is important. The tag must be mounted so that the holes on

the tag base plate are on the top edge.

eGo Plus LPT Installation Procedures

To mount the eGo Plus LPT

1. Remove the screws from the license plate area of your front bumper (Figure 3-

13). If your vehicle does not have mounting screws you will need two self-

tapping threaded screws. You can also contact the tag agency to inquire about the

optional TransCore Exterior Tag Accessory Kit.

Note: You may need to use longer screws to fasten the LPT over the top area of your

license plate.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-14

Figure 3-13 Correct Mounting Location for LPT

2. Position the LPT so that it is within 18 inches (46 cm) of the center of the front

bumper as shown by the shaded area in Figure 3-13. If your vehicle’s license

plate mounting area is more than 18 inches (46 cm) from the center, you may

need to select an alternate location to mount the tag. Contact your tag agency if

your vehicle requires an alternate mounting location for the LPT.

3. Hold the LPT so that the etched lettering is facing you with the mounting holes to

the top as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Correct Tag Orientation

4. Fasten the LPT to the bumper using the license plate mounting screws 

(Figure 3-15). Install the LPT over the top area of the vehicle’s license plate if

your vehicle has a front license plate. If your state does not require a front license

plate, install the LPT in the area where a license plate would normally be

mounted.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-15

Figure 3-15 Upper Placement Over the Top Area of the License Plate

Installing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

eGo WSTs are designed to be attached by a semi-permanent adhesive to the interior

surface of nonmetallic windshields 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thick-

ness. For optimum performance, you must install the tag at least 2 inches (5 cm) from

the metal in the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9 cm) from the rearview mirror

support post. Detailed instructions are found in the pocket guide “Quick and Easy

Installation Instructions for Windshield Sticker Tag.”

Some vehicles have a tinted area across the top of the windshield. If the tint is conduc-

tive, it can interfere with reading the tag. If a windshield has this conductive tint, the

tag must be installed at least 2 inches (5 cm) below this tinted area.

Some vehicle windshields contain a metallic treatment that could prevent an interior

windshield-mounted tag from being read. However, many of these metallized wind-

shields have areas that are not metallized. On a vehicle without open areas in its met-

allized windshield, you might need to install an Encompass 4 Reader-compatible LPT

on the vehicle. See the section “Installing eGo Plus License Plate Tags” on page 3-13

and the section “Installing ATA License Plate Tags” on page 3-21. Contact TransCore

for more information. See the section “Technical Support” on page 9-7.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-16

Required Materials

You need the following supplies to install an eGo WSTs:

•Glass cleaner, mild detergent and water, or any cleaning solution appropriate for

your windshield

•Clean, dry cloth

•eGo WST

Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

TransCore designed the eGo WST to be installed on the upper center or upper corner

portion of the windshield. Figure 3-16, Figure 3-17, and Figure 3-18 illustrate possible

upper center tag placement locations. If the upper portion of the windshield is

tinted with an aftermarket conductive tint, use placement Option B as shown in

Figure 3-17.

Mirror Post Attached Low On Windshield

Choose placement Option A shown in Figure 3-16 if the mirror post is attached low on

the windshield.

Figure 3-16 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option A

Mirror Post Attached High on Windshield

Choose placement Option B if the mirror post is attached high on the windshield as

shown in Figure 3-17 or if the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with a conduc-

tive tint.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-17

Figure 3-17 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option B

Mirror Post Attached to Headliner

Choose placement Option C if the mirror post is attached to the headliner as shown in

Figure 3-18. If the upper portion of the windshield is tinted with an aftermarket

conductive tint, place the tag two inches (5 cm) below the tinted area.

Figure 3-18 eGo Windshield Sticker Tag Placement Option C

Mounting the eGo Windshield Sticker Tag

Caution

Confirm that the outside temperature is above 50°F (10°C). The sticker tag may not

adhere correctly if the temperature is below this temperature.

To install the eGo WST

1. Determine the tag installation location for the vehicle using the placement

guidelines in the section “Positioning eGo Windshield Sticker Tags” on page 3-

16.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-18

2. Thoroughly clean the interior surface of the windshield behind and around the

rearview mirror where the tag will be located.

3. Dry the tag location area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

4. Remove the paper backing from the tag to expose the adhesive.

Caution

Ensure that the tag is correctly located before touching it to the glass. Once the

sticker tag is applied to the glass, it cannot be moved without damage to the tag.

5. Holding the sticker tag by its edges, position the tag in the correct area of the

windshield (determined in Step 1), making sure the tag is oriented horizontally

and is at least two inches (5 cm) from the windshield frame and 0.75 inch (1.9

cm) from the mirror post.

6. Press the sticker tag firmly against the glass and gently rub over the entire tag

surface. Ensure that no air bubbles remain between the sticker tag and the

windshield.

Removing eGo Windshield Sticker Tags

Removing eGo WSTs requires the use of a plastic scraper or equivalent tool. The tag

is inoperable once removed.

Installing eGo LPT

Follow the instructions presented in “eGo Plus License Plate Tag” on page 3-5 when

installing an eGo LPT.

Installing Interior ATA Tags

Interior ATA-protocol tags are installed using hook-and-loop material or double-sided

tape attached to the tag and to the windshield. When using hook-and-loop material,

the loop material should be applied to the back of the tag and the hook material should

be applied to the windshield. After the tag is installed, it can be removed easily and

used in any vehicle that has corresponding hook material affixed to the windshield.

Note: Installing interior tags using double-sided tape results in a semipermanent

attachment; the tag will be more difficult to remove than one installed using hook and

loop material.

Interior ATA-protocol tags may be ordered from the factory with hook-and-loop

material or double-sided tape already applied to the tag. The adhesive on this material

is specially formulated for temperature extremes inside vehicles.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-19

Required Materials

You will need the following materials to install interior tags:

•Rubbing alcohol or 50/50 isopropyl alcohol and water

•Sponge and dry cloth

•Interior tags with two strips of factory-installed hook-and-loop material or fac-

tory-installed double-sided tape attached

Positioning ATA Tags

Interior ATA-protocol tags can be installed on the driver’s side, passenger’s side, or

upper center of the vehicle’s windshield, depending on the Encompass 4 Reader’s

position. See “Reader and Tag Alignment” on page 2-4.

Tags should be mounted consistently in all vehicles using a particular Encompass 4

Reader facility.

Interior Driver’s or Passenger’s Side

TransCore designed interior ATA-protocol tags for installation inside the vehicle, typ-

ically on the driver’s side of the windshield. Install the tag in the upper corner, at least

two inches (5 cm) from the metal window post, as shown in Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19 Driver’s or Passenger’s Side (U.S.) Interior Windshield Tag Location

Interior Center Windshield

You may also install ATA tags on the upper center portion of the windshield. Position

the tag as closely as possible to the windshield’s upper center, behind the rearview

mirror. The top edge of the tag should be approximately one inch (2.5 cm) below the

base of the mirror, or above the base if enough room is available for the tag to be two

inches (five cm) from metal around the windshield, as shown in Figure 3-20.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-20

Figure 3-20 Upper Center Interior Windshield Tag Location

ATA Interior Tag Installation Procedures

Perform the following steps to install interior tags:

1. Clean the tag installation area on the interior surface of the windshield with

rubbing alcohol.

2. Dry the area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

3. Remove the clear backing from the two strips of hook-and-loop material on the

back of the tag (Figure 3-21) or from the double-sided tape.

Figure 3-21 Hook-and-Loop Material on Interior Tag

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-21

4. Position the tag over the correct area of the windshield, making sure that the tag

and reader orientation are the same (horizontal or vertical).

5. Press the tag firmly against the glass.

Removing Interior ATA Tags

To remove an interior ATA-protocol tag installed using hook-and-loop material,

simply pull the tag away from the windshield.

To remove an interior ATA-protocol tag installed using double-sided tape, slowly pry

off the tag with a thin tool, such as a putty knife.

Installing ATA License Plate Tags

Metallized coatings on some vehicle windshields and windows absorb the RF energy

emitted by the Encompass 4 Reader, thus causing tags to be misread. Use exterior

LPTs on vehicles with metallized coatings on windshields and windows.

Use license plate installation techniques to install tags on the exterior of vehicles that

have this type of window coating.

Note: The read zone of an overhead Encompass 4 Reader should be adjusted accord-

ingly when an exterior tag is installed on a license plate, or the read zone will be

reduced.

Exterior tags may be installed on metal or plastic bumpers using the existing license

plate bracket and hardware.

The tag can be mounted on the front bumper where the license plate is normally

located or mounted directly to the front license plate or license plate bracket. Once

installed, the face of the tag should be pointing directly forward or slightly upward. If

the bumper, license plate, or license plate bracket has any material that overhangs the

tag, the tag will not function properly.

Required Materials

You need the following supplies to install license-plate mounted tags:

•Exterior LPT

•Two 0.25-inch (.63 cm) bolts and nuts (user-supplied). Length of the bolts can

vary depending on vehicle model.

•Screwdriver and wrench (user-supplied)

•0.25-inch (.63 cm) spacers or washers (if needed). Thickness of spacers can vary

depending on vehicle model.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-22

Positioning ATA License Plate Tags

The orientation of the tag is important. The tag must be mounted so that the holes on

the tag base plate are on the bottom edge. See Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Proper Tag Orientation

When positioning the tag, observe the following guidelines:

•The tag should be horizontal and parallel to the ground.

•The tag face should be perpendicular or tilted slightly upward.

• The tag may lean to the rear a maximum of 30 degrees.

• The tag may lean to the front a maximum of 10 degrees.

ATA License Plate Tag Installation Procedures

To mount the LPT

1. Position the tag so that the holes in the tag are on the bottom edge and the tag is

within 18 inches (.45 m) of the center of the front bumper as illustrated by the

shaded area in Figure 3-23.

Note: When mounting an exterior tag on heavy trucks or tractors, the tag must

be mounted within 1.5 inches (3.81 cm) of the top of the bumper.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-23

Figure 3-23 Correct Exterior Tag Placement

2. Line up the holes in the tag as follows:

• If mounting the tag to a license plate or license plate bracket, line up the

holes in the tag to the upper holes of the license plate or license plate

bracket.

Note: Do not mount the tag to the bottom holes of the license plate or license

plate bracket. The reflective material on the license plate may interfere with the

proper functioning of the tag.

• If mounting the tag to the bumper, line up the holes in the tag with the holes

in the front bumper where the license plate would normally be located.

See Figure 3-23.

3. Insert bolts through the tag base plate holes and the holes in the bumper or the

holes in the upper portion of the license plate area. See Figure 3-24.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-24

Figure 3-24 Upper Placement In License Plate Area

4. Make sure the area within 45 degrees of the center of the tag is free of

obstructions. See Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 Obstruction-Free Area

5. Make sure that no material overhangs the tag. If overhang is more than ½ inch

(1.27 cm), insert spacers or washers directly behind the tag so that the tag is clear

of any overhanging obstruction. Secure the bolts with a nut. See Figure 3-26.

Choosing, Installing, and Removing Tags

3-25

Figure 3-26 Spacer Positioned Behind Tag

6. Tighten the bolts and nuts with a screwdriver and wrench to secure the tag to the

vehicle.

Types of Bumpers

When mounting tags directly to a bumper, consider the following factors:

•Tags can be mounted on any metal or non-metallic surface; composition of

bumper does not matter.

•Tags can be mounted to plastic bumpers using self-threading screws.

•Metal bumpers should be pre-drilled; self-threading screws may be used.

Alternate Mounting Locations

If the exterior type tag cannot be mounted on the license plate bracket or directly on

the bumper, it may be mounted on a relatively vertical front surface of the vehicle. The

exterior tag should be mounted as close to the bumper as possible, following all guide-

lines regarding orientation, obstruction, and overhang given for bumper mounting. For

applications where the integrity of the mounting surface cannot be compromised, the

exterior tag can be mounted on a smooth flat surface using double-sided tape.

Required Materials

Exterior tags need to be installed on a relatively flat surface. You need the following

materials to install exterior tags:

•Rubbing alcohol, 50/50 isopropyl alcohol and water, or solvent/cleaner for metal

•Sponge and dry cloth

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

3-26

•Exterior tag with the double-sided adhesive tape attached

Installation Procedures Using Tape

To install the tag on a metal or plastic bumper

1. Clean and degrease the tag installation area of the vehicle bumper with solvent/

cleaner.

2. Dry the area thoroughly using a clean, dry cloth.

3. Remove the backing from the double-sided tape on the back of the tag, as shown

in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Exterior Tag with Double-Sided Tape

4. Position the tag over the installation area, making sure that the tag and

Encompass 4 Reader are horizontally polarized.

5. Press the tag firmly against the bumper.

Installation Procedures Using Blind Rivets

To install an exterior tag using blind rivets through the tag’s installation

tabs

1. Position the tag on the bumper in the installation area and mark the hole positions

of the tag’s installation tabs on the bumper.

2. Follow the rivet manufacturer’s instructions to drill holes in the bumper for

rivets.

3. If the rivet head is smaller than the tag installation holes and can be pulled

through the holes, use a small washer to secure the rivet through the tag.

Removing Exterior Tags

To remove an exterior tag installed with rivets, follow the rivet manufacturer’s

instructions to remove the rivets.

-1

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-3

Chapter 4

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

This chapter lists the materials needed and presents the procedures to

pre-test and install the Encompass® 4 Reader.

Installation Process

Note: In this section, unless specifically stated, “Encompass 4 Reader” applies both

to the Encompass 4 Reader with integrated antenna and Encompass 4 Reader with

external antenna.

After you have developed the site plan and identified the location to install the

Encompass 4 Reader and antenna1, if required, you are ready to install the equipment.

Installation involves the following tasks:

•Pre-installation testing of Encompass 4 Reader power and tag read capability

•Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader, and antenna if required, on a pole, ceiling, or

wall

•Discharging voltage from an external antenna

•Connecting the antenna

•Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader power

•Marking the read zone

•Connecting the Encompass 4 host and sense input/sense output and communica-

tions

Materials Supplied by TransCore

You need the following materials to pre-test and install the Encompass 4 Reader.

TransCore supplies some of the materials; other materials must be obtained from other

sources.

Contents of Shipping Carton

Ensure that you have received all parts before beginning your pre-installation Encom-

1. The Encompass 4 Reader is designed with an integrated patch antenna or with a RF

cable connector for use with an external antenna. Unless noted in the text, “antenna”

refers to an “external antenna.”

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-4

pass 4 Reader tests. Your Encompass 4 Reader is packaged with the following materi-

als:

•One Encompass 4 Reader

•One mounting bracket and the mounting hardware

•One Encompass 4 Reader Quick Start Guide

•Any accessories ordered as options as shown in Table 4-1

Required accessories are a power/communications cable harness and a 110V AC wall

transformer or a 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer. If you are using an antenna

with the Encompass 4, you also require an Encompass 4 Reader-compatible antenna

and an antenna RF interface. These may be ordered as accessories from TransCore or

obtained from other sources.

Installation Accessory Options

Table 4-1 lists optional TransCore Encompass 4 Reader installation accessory items.

Table 4-1 Installation Accessories

Part No. Description

54-1620-001 Wall or ceiling mount kit

58-1620-001 5-ft connector cable harness

58-1620-002 20-ft connector cable harness

20-1620-003 Connector kit only

56-1620-004 13-pair cable (sold by the foot)

76-1620-005 110V AC to 18V AC Class C transformer

76-1620-006 12V AC to 18V AC step-up transformer

16-4000-002 Encompass 4 Reader System Guide (this manual)

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader may be ordered with a multwire cable harness (part

number 58-1620-001 or 58-1620-002 in Table 4-1) as a separate accessory. One end

has a waterproof connector for the Encompass 4 Reader, and the other end has 13

pairs of color-coded wires.

Additional Materials Needed for Testing

You need these additional materials to perform the pre-tests on the Encompass 4

Reader:

•Test tags, supplied by the TransCore dealer or distributor

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-5

•Suitable 18V AC or 18V DC power wiring for the Encompass 4 Reader

•Audible circuit tester and 9V DC battery for circuit tester power

•Wire stripper

•One Encompass 4 Reader-compatible antenna (if required)

•Suitable RF interface coaxial cable (if using antenna)

Pre-installation Testing of the Encompass 4 Reader

Before installing the Encompass 4 Reader permanently at the site, you should use an

audible circuit tester to confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader has power and can read

a tag presented in the tag read zone.

You also need to ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader-compatible antenna has had any

voltage properly discharged prior to connecting it to the reader.

Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audi-

ble Circuit Tester

An audible circuit tester is also called a buzz box. These boxes are available at some

electronic parts supply stores, or you can make a buzz box, as shown in Figure 4-1.

The buzz box is powered by a 9V DC battery and is equipped with two alligator-clip

leads. When you touch the leads together, the box makes an audible sound.

Figure 4-1 Wiring for Audible Circuit Tester

To test the Encompass 4 Reader that uses an integrated antenna, connect the power

supply as described in the appropriate section below, and then test as described in the

section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page 4-13.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-6

Caution

During shipping and installation, an external antenna can build up a very high volt-

age charge. The voltage needs to be discharged before connecting the antenna to

the reader.

To test the Encompass 4 Reader that uses an external antenna, connect the antenna and

power supply as described in the appropriate section below, and then test as described

in the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page 4-

13.

Discharging Voltage from the External Antenna

Use these instructions to discharge high voltage from the external antenna before pro-

ceeding with further pre-installation testing of the reader connected to an external

antenna.

Required Equipment

This procedure requires the following equipment.

•TransCore Encompass 4 Reader (external antenna models only)

•External antenna

•RF cable

•N-type load (e.g., 50 ) or RF attenuator (e.g., 20 dB)

Discharging the Voltage

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-7

1. Terminate the reader end of the RF cable with any N-type load or RF attenuator

(Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2 Connect RF N-type Load or Attenuator to Reader Cable End

2. Connect the RF cable to the antenna (see item 1 in Figure 4-3).

Figure 4-3 Short Load to Earth Ground

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-8

3. Short the outer metal case of the load or attenuator to Earth Ground for

approximately 10 seconds (see item 2 in Figure 4-3). In this example, the

operator is using the mounting screw of the electrical outlet faceplate for Earth

Ground.

4. Remove the load or attenuator from the RF cable and connect cable to reader.

Once the antenna is discharged and properly connected to the reader, the reader

circuitry provides a DC path to keep any further charge from building up in the

antenna.

Caution

TransCore does not recommend using a screwdriver or other tool to short the

RF cable center conductor to the outer ground of the cable. This grounding

method can damage the center pin or the threads of the connector.

TransCore strongly advises that you use adequate Earth Ground for this voltage

discharge procedure in accordance with the National Electric Code for the

locale where you are installing the Encompass 4 Reader.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-9

Connecting the External Antenna

Use these instructions to connect the Encompass 4 Reader and external antenna.

Figure 4-4 Back of Encompass 4 Reader Showing Antenna Connector

To connect the reader and antenna

1. Ensure the reader is turned off and unplugged.

2. Connect one end of the RF interface cable to the antenna.

3. Connect the other end of the RF interface cable to the antenna connector on the

back of the Encompass 4 Reader. See Figure 4-4.

Connecting the AC Power Supply

Caution

If you are using an external antenna, to avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader,

you must connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage AC power supply

1. Connect the Encompass 4 power wires from the cable to the transformer using

the color coding as described in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Transformer

Terminal Strip

Wire Pair from

Encompass

4 Reader

Cable

Color Used

Main power input Brown/Red and 

Orange/Red Orange and

Brown L1

(16 to 20V AC)

Main power return Red and Red L2

(16 to 20V AC)

2. Complete the power connections at the power supply.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-10

Connecting the DC Power Supply

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage DC power supply

Caution

If you are using an external antenna, to avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader,

you must connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

1. Connect the Encompass 4 Reader power wires from the cable to the low-voltage

terminals using the connection designations shown in Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for the Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connection Use

Wire Pair from

Encompass 4

Reader Cable Color Used

Main power input Brown/Red and 

Orange/Red Orange and

brown 16 to 28V DC+ terminal

Main power return Red and red 16 to 28V DC- terminal

Connecting Communications for Bench Testing

TransCore offers reader models that communicate through RS–232, RS–422, and

Wiegand interface protocols. This section describes the procedures and materials

required for connecting the communications to perform pre-installation bench testing

of the Encompass 4 Reader.

Required Materials

You need the following materials to connect the communications cable to the PC:

•PC or laptop

•Any terminal emulation program such as Procomm Plus™ or Hyper Terminal™

running on a PC

•Communications cable to connect to the COM1 port on your PC

Encompass 4 Reader communications and customer interface signals are supplied

from the Encompass 4 Reader to the host through a multiwire cable, which is a 13-pair

pigtail. The connector for this cable is located on the back of the Encompass 4 Reader.

Refer to the following sections to connect the appropriate communications wires from

the cable to the PC.

These sections contain instructions for connecting RS–232 and RS–422 communica-

tions between the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC for bench testing purposes. Each

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-11

section contains wiring instructions and pin assignments followed by step-by-step

connection procedures.

The Encompass 4 Reader can remain powered up while connecting reader-to-host PC

communications.

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–232 Interface

RS–232 interface signals are supplied by three or five wires from the Encompass 4

communications cable. The pin assignments for the signal to the host male DB9 and

DB25 connectors are shown in boldface in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Pin Assignments for Signal to Host Connectors

Note: In Figure 4-5 supported pin assignments are in boldface.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-12

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Table 4-4 shows the RS–232 colored wire assignments.

Table 4-4 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass

4 Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass 4

Reader

Color Used

TxD —

Encompass 4

Reader output,

host input

Red/Black Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD —

Encompass 4

Reader input, host

output

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS —

Encompass 4

Reader output,

host input

Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS —

Encompass 4

Reader input, host

output

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–232 interface

1. Connect the black wire (transmit data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 2

of the DB9 connector or pin 3 of the DB25 connector.

2. Connect the red wire (receive data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 3 of

the DB9 connector or pin 2 of the DB25 connector.

3. Connect either the yellow or black wire (signal ground) from the yellow and

black wire pair to pin 5 of the DB9 connector or pin 7 of the DB25 connector.

4. Plug the DB9 connector or DB25 connector into the PC.

If the host is set up for hardware handshaking, use the following procedures:

1. Connect the yellow wire (RTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 8 of the

DB9 connector or pin 5 of the DB25 connector.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-13

2. Connect the red wire (CTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 7 of the DB9

connector or pin 4 of the DB25 connector.

Connecting for Bench Testing with RS–422 Interface

RS–422 interface signals are supplied by four wires from the Encompass 4 Reader

communications cable. Your host must have an RS–422 interface with either an inter-

nal or external converter.

Note: For temporary bench testing purposes only, you will need to connect the RS–

422 interface signal wires by following the pin-outs of your interface device. For per-

manent installations, follow the RS–422 connection instructions on page 4-32.

Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before

Installation

The Encompass 4 Reader is set to read the tag protocol(s) programmed into your

reader.

Note: Test tags should match the protocol(s) selected for your reader. These tags can

be ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant tags, or Inter-Agency Group tags affixed to a plastic

or wooden yardstick, or eGo Plus Sticker Tag or eGo Windshield Sticker Tags (WSTs)

affixed to a piece of nonmetallic windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 in (4.82 to 5.84

mm) in thickness. The eGo and eGo Plus sticker tags have a reduced read range when

not attached to glass.

To test that the Encompass 4 Reader has power and can read a tag pre-

sented in the read zone

1. Confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader colored-wire pair cable is correctly

connected to a suitable AC or DC low-voltage power supply as discussed on page

4-9 and page 4-10 and that the transformer is connected to a power outlet.

If you are using an external antenna, confirm that the antenna is connected to the

Encompass 4 Reader.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before

applying power to the reader.

2. Confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader colored-wire pair cable communications

are connected correctly as described in the section “Connecting Communications

for Bench Testing” on page 4-10.

3. Connect the two leads from the audible circuit tester to the white and red wire

pair (pair #8, lock/lock return) from the Encompass 4 Reader power/

communications cable.

4. Start the terminal emulation application Microsoft HyperTerminal by selecting

Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal and press

ENTER.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-14

5. In the HyperTerminal dialog boxes choose the com port to which the

communications interface is attached and set the properties as:

• Bits per second: 9600 baud

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: none

• Stop bits: 1

• Flow control: none

6. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4 Reader and ensure that the sign-on message

displays.

7. Input the following commands in the order provided in Table 4-5. Commands

include those to switch to command mode, set radio frequency (RF), turn on RF,

and return the reader to data mode.

Table 4-5 Commands for Bench Testing

Entry Reader Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches Encompass 4

Reader to command

mode.

#647XXX #Done <CR/LF> Sets frequency

#6401 #Done <CR/LF> Turns on RF.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns Encompass 4

Reader to data mode.

8. Pass the correct test tag for your reader application in front of the Encompass 4

Reader or antenna. The audible circuit tester should sound a tone when the tag is

read. If no tone sounds, ensure that steps 1, through 5 were performed correctly

and that you are using a compatible tag. Repeat steps 6 and 7. If no tone sounds,

contact TransCore (see “Technical Support” on page 9-7).

9. Disconnect the circuit tester from the Encompass 4 Reader power/

communications cable.

10. Disconnect the power and communications connections made for pre-installation

testing.

Note: You will need the audible circuit tester again to determine the read zone when

installing the Encompass 4 Reader at the site.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-15

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader

This section lists procedures and materials required for mounting the Encompass 4

Reader on a round pole or on a ceiling, wall, or other flat surface based on the site’s

requirements.

In permanent installations using an antenna, the Encompass 4 Reader should be posi-

tioned as close as possible to the antenna. Long cable runs increase system sensitivity

to noise. See Table 2-6 on page 2-22 for maximum RF cable lengths.

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader on a Round

Pole

The Encompass 4 Reader can be simply and inexpensively mounted on a round pole.

The pole must be a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) in diameter and should extend

approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement level. The pole must be installed

according to local building codes.

Required Materials To Be Supplied by Customer

You need the following materials to mount the Encompass 4 Reader on a round pole:

•A 5/32-inch Allen wrench to assemble and adjust the mounting brackets

•Two 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) wide, stainless steel hose clamp straps that are 12 inches

(30.5 cm) long for a typical 2-inch (5-cm) diameter pole or 24 inches (61 cm) long

for a 10-inch (25-cm) diameter pole

•Flat-tip screwdriver or adjustable wrench to tighten hose clamp straps

•Length of 12-14 AWG wire, stake, and clamps to connect reader to earth ground.

Procedures

To mount the Encompass 4 Reader to a pole

1. Unpack the Encompass 4 Reader. A factory-mounted bracket (Figure 4-6 and

Figure 4-7) is attached to the back of the Encompass 4 Reader. A pole mount

bracket assembly (Figure 4-8) is bubble-wrapped separately and contains a

plastic bag of four Allen screws and washers.

2. Using the two 0.5 inch (1.3 cm) stainless steel hose clamps, attach the pole mount

bracket assembly to the pole approximately 8 feet (2.4m) above the pavement

surface. Tighten slightly so you can adjust the Encompass 4 Reader left or right,

but not so slightly the straps slide down the pole.

Factory-mounted bracket

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-16

Figure 4-6 Back of the Encompass 4 Reader (reader shown has integrated

antenna)

Figure 4-7 Factory-Mounted Bracket

Figure 4-8 Pole-Mount Bracket Assembly

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-17

3. Using the four Allen screws and washers, attach the Encompass 4 Reader to the

pole mount bracket as shown in Figure 4-9. Tighten the screws slightly so

that the Encompass 4 Reader can be adjusted up or down, but not so slightly the

mounting assembly slips.

Figure 4-9 The Encompass 4 Reader Attached to the Pole Mount Bracket

4. Adjust the assembly by pointing the Encompass 4 Reader to the middle of the

area where tags will be read, and tighten all screws and straps slightly.

Note: Adjust the Encompass 4 Reader to provide the most direct line of sight to

the tags.

Figure 4-10 illustrates front and top views of a pole-mounted Encompass 4 Reader

with the approximate measurements for sites where tags would be mounted on the

interior driver-side windshield. eGo WSTs may be mounted on the interior upper cen-

ter or upper corner of the windshield, eGo Plus Sticker and Security Sticker tags may

be mounted on the interior upper center of the windshield.

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.

Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-38.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-18

Figure 4-10 Front and Top Views of the Encompass 4 Reader Position

Note: The dimensions in Figure 4-10 are for demonstration purposes only and are

approximations for sites using the older ATA-type tags. Actual dimensions vary as

lane geometry and tag style varies from site to site. Adjust the Encompass 4 Reader

matching site and tag mounting positions to provide the most direct line of sight to the

tags.

Caution

To ensure reliable reader operation, TransCore strongly advises that you follow the

National Electric Code for lightning protection for the locale where you are install-

ing the Encompass 4 Reader.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-19

Mounting the Encompass 4 Reader to a Wall or

Flat Surface

The basic Encompass 4 Reader is supplied with a pole-mount bracket assembly (Fig-

ure 4-8) that allows you to adjust the Encompass 4 Reader up and down. TransCore

recommends using the wall-mount bracket accessory kit (Figure 4-11) in addition to

the pole-mount bracket to provide additional horizontal aiming flexibility when

attaching the Encompass 4 Reader to a pole with flat sides or to a wall or ceiling

where other structures can interfere with accurately aiming the Encompass 4 Reader

toward the tags.

Figure 4-11 Wall Mount Bracket Accessory (part number 54-1620-001)

Required Materials

You need the following materials to install the Encompass 4 Reader on a wall or flat

surface. Ensure the use of high-quality, corrosion-resistant anchor hardware.

•Anchor hardware suitable for the surface on which you mount the Encompass 4

Reader

Because the Encompass 4 Reader weighs only 9 1/2 lbs (4.3 kg), 0.25 in (0.6 cm)

bolt hardware is adequate to secure the unit to a wall or ceiling.

•Four hex nuts 3/8-16 threaded and four lockwashers

•5/32-inch Allen wrench

•One Encompass 4 wall mount bracket accessory kit (required)

Procedures

To mount the Encompass 4 Reader to a wall or ceiling

1. Unpack the Encompass 4 Reader. Set aside the pole mount bracket.

Use the bracket in the remaining steps to provide greater adjustment for the

Encompass 4 Reader. The pole-mount bracket is wrapped separately from the

Encompass 4 Reader and contains a plastic bag of four Allen screws and washers.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-20

2. Using the 5/32-inch Allen wrench, remove the factory-mounted bracket attached

to the back of the Encompass 4 Reader. Remove all four Allen screws and lock

washers from the bracket and set aside.

3. Unpack the wall-mount bracket accessory kit.

4. Using the Allen screws and lock washers set aside in Step 2, attach the wall-

mount bracket to the back of the Encompass 4 Reader, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 Wall Mount Bracket Attached to the Encompass 4 Reader

5. Tighten the screws to secure the bracket.

6. Using the four screws and washers supplied with the wall-mount bracket, attach

the factory-mounted bracket to the wall mount bracket, lining up the four outside

screw holes as shown in Figure 4-13.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-21

Figure 4-13 Factory-Mounted Bracket Attached to Wall Mount Bracket

7. Tighten lightly, since you will want to adjust the bracket later. This subassembly

allows you to aim the Encompass 4 Reader left or right when all three brackets

are assembled.

8. Mount the pole-mount bracket to the wall, ceiling, or fixture using appropriate

anchors as shown in Figure 4-14.

Figure 4-14 Pole Mount Bracket Attached to Wall

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-22

9. Mount the Encompass 4 Reader to the pole-mount bracket using Allen screws, as

shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Connecting the Encompass 4 Assembly to Pole Mount Bracket

10. Adjust the assembly by pointing the Encompass 4 Reader to the middle of the

area where tags will be read and tighten all screws and straps slightly.

Note: Adjust the Encompass 4 Reader to provide the most direct line of sight to the

tags.

Caution

To ensure reliable reader operation, TransCore strongly advises that you follow the

National Electric Code for lightning protection for the locale where you are install-

ing the Encompass 4 Reader.

After mounting the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect it to a dedicated 16 to 20V

AC or 16 to 28V DC power supply.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before

applying power to the reader.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-23

Mounting the Antenna

If you are using the Encompass 4 Reader that requires an external antenna in perma-

nent installations, the antenna should be positioned as close as possible to the Encom-

pass 4 Reader. Long cable runs increase system sensitivity to noise. See Table 2-6 on

page 2-22 for maximum RF cable lengths.

Before you connect the external antenna to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must per-

form the following voltage discharge procedure.

Discharging Voltage from the External Antenna

Use these instructions to discharge high voltage from the external antenna before pro-

ceeding with further pre-installation testing of the reader connected to an external

antenna.

Required Equipment

This procedure requires the following equipment.

•TransCore Encompass 4 Reader (external antenna models only)

•External antenna

•RF cable

•N-type load (e.g., 50 ) or RF attenuator (e.g., 20 dB)

Discharging the Voltage

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-24

1. Terminate the reader end of the RF cable with any N-type load or RF attenuator

(Figure 4-16).

Figure 4-16 Connect RF N-type Load or Attenuator to Reader Cable End

2. Connect the RF cable to the antenna (see item 1 in Figure 4-17).

Figure 4-17 Short Load to Earth Ground

3. Short the outer metal case of the load or attenuator to Earth Ground for

approximately 10 seconds (see item 2 in Figure 4-17). In this example, the

installer is using the electrical conduit for Earth Ground.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-25

4. Remove the load or attenuator from the RF cable and connect cable to reader.

Once the antenna is discharged and properly connected to the reader, the reader

circuitry provides a DC path to keep any further charge from building up in the

antenna.

Caution

TransCore does not recommend using a screwdriver or other tool to short the

RF cable center conductor to the outer ground of the cable. This grounding

method can damage the center pin or the threads of the connector.

TransCore strongly advises that you use adequate Earth Ground for this voltage

discharge procedure in accordance with the National Electric Code for the

locale where you are installing the Encompass 4 Reader.

Mounting the Antenna Curb-Side

Some site designs, for example those with curb-side antennas, require that the antenna

be mounted on a round pole. The pole must be a minimum of 2 inches (5 cm) in diam-

eter and should extend approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement level. The

pole must be installed according to local building codes.

Note: Do not use an AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna for side-fire application.

Procedures

Use the following guidelines to mount an antenna on a curb-side round pole.

To mount the antenna to a curb-side pole

1. Follow the manufacturer’s directions to attach the antenna assembly to the pole

approximately 8 feet (2.4 m) above the pavement surface.

2. Tighten slightly so that you can adjust the antenna left or right but not so slightly

that the antenna slides down the pole.

3. Adjust the assembly by pointing the antenna to the middle of the area where tags

will be read, and while in this position, tighten all screws and fastenings slightly.

Note: Adjust the antenna to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

Figure 4-18 illustrates front and top views of a pole-mounted antenna with the approx-

imate measurements for sites where tags would be mounted on the interior driver-side

windshield.

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.

Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-38.

After mounting the antenna, you must connect it to the Encompass 4 Reader. Follow

the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the External Antenna”

on page 4-9.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-26

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before

applying power to the reader.

Figure 4-18 Front and Top Views of the Curb-Side Antenna Position

Note: The dimensions in Figure 4-18 are for demonstration purposes only and are

approximations for sites using the older ATA-type tags. Actual dimensions vary as

lane geometry and tag style varies from site to site. Adjust the antenna to match site

and tag mounting positions to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-27

Mounting the Antenna Overhead

Some site designs require that the antenna be mounted in an overhead location.

Procedures

To mount the antenna in an overhead location

1. Follow the manufacturer’s directions to attach the antenna assembly to the

overhead location at approximately 18 feet above the pavement surface.

2. Tighten slightly so that you can adjust the antenna up and down but not so

slightly that there is a risk of the antenna falling.

3. Adjust the assembly by pointing the antenna to the middle of the area where tags

will be read, and while in this position, tighten all screws and fastenings slightly.

Note: Adjust the antenna to provide the most direct line of sight to the tags.

For example, in toll lanes the Universal Toll Antenna (UTA) would be installed

approximately 15 degrees from the vertical.

Figure 4-19 illustrates an overhead-mounted antenna with approximate measurements

for the read zone.

Figure 4-19 Encompass 4 Reader Installation with Overhead Antenna

Note: Determine the read zone before you tighten all screws and straps permanently.

Refer to the section “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-38.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-28

After mounting the antenna, you must connect it to the Encompass 4 Reader. Follow

the procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the External Antenna”

on page 4-9.

Connecting the Power Supply

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage AC power supply follow the

procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the AC Power Supply” on

page 4-9.

To connect the Encompass 4 Reader to a low-voltage DC power supply follow the

procedures described previously in the section “Connecting the DC Power Supply” on

page 4-10.

After mounting the Encompass 4 Reader and antenna, if required, you must connect

the reader to a dedicated 16 to 20V AC or 16 to 28V DC power supply.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader, you must connect the antenna before

applying power to the reader.

Reader Cable Grounding

Ensure that you connect the communications cable shield drain wire to Earth Ground

and the yellow/black wires to Signal Ground (Figure 4-20).

Figure 4-20 Recommended Reader Cable Grounding

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-29

Caution

Do not ground the input power supply.

Caution

After connecting the wires in the communications cable, connect the drain wire

from the communications cable to Earth Ground. Connect the yellow/black wires to

Signal Ground.

Connecting Communications

TransCore offers reader models that communicate through RS–232, RS–422, and

Wiegand interface protocols. This section describes the procedures and materials

required for connecting the communications to the junction box and to the sense input

and sense output circuits.

Required Materials

You need the following materials to connect the communications cable to the PC:

•PC or laptop

•Any terminal emulation program such as Procomm Plus™ or Hyper Terminal™

running on a PC

•Communications cable to connect to the COM1 port on your PC

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader to the PC

Encompass 4 Reader communications and customer interface signals are supplied

from the Encompass 4 Reader to the host through a multiwire cable, which is a 13-pair

pigtail. The connector for this cable is located on the back of the Encompass 4 Reader.

Refer to the following sections to connect the appropriate communications wires from

the cable to the terminal strip that is located inside the junction box.

These sections contain instructions for connecting RS–232, RS–422, and Wiegand

communications between the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC. Each section contains

wiring instructions and pin assignments followed by step-by-step connection proce-

dures.

The Encompass 4 Reader can remain powered up while connecting reader-to-host PC

communications.

RS–232 Interface

RS–232 interface signals are supplied by three or five wires from the Encompass 4

Reader communications cable. The pin assignments for the signal to the host male

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-30

DB9 and DB25 connectors are shown in boldface in Figure 4-5.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-31

Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Table 4-6 shows the RS–232 colored wire assignments.

Table 4-6 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass 4

Reader

Color Used

TxD —

Encompass 4

Reader output,

host input

Red/Black Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD —

Encompass 4

Reader input, host

output

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS —

Encompass 4

Reader output,

host input

Yellow/Red Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS —

Encompass 4

Reader input, host

output

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–232 interface

1. Connect the black wire (transmit data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 2

of the DB9 connector or pin 3 of the DB25 connector.

2. Connect the red wire (receive data) from the red and black wire pair to pin 3 of

the DB9 connector or pin 2 of the DB25 connector.

3. Connect either the yellow or black wire (signal ground) from the yellow and

black wire pair to pin 5 of the DB9 connector or pin 7 of the DB25 connector.

4. Plug the DB9 connector or DB25 connector into the PC.

If the host is set up for hardware handshaking, use the following procedures:

1. Connect the yellow wire (RTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 8 of the

DB9 connector or pin 5 of the DB25 connector.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-32

2. Connect the red wire (CTS) from the yellow and red wire pair to pin 7 of the DB9

connector or pin 4 of the DB25 connector.

Note: When extending the RS-232 interface, use a three-pair cable such as Belden

2919. Use a twisted pair for the Black (RxD) with ground (Black of the Black and Yel-

low pair), and a twisted pair for Red (TxD) with ground (Black of the Black and Yel-

low pair). The third pair of the three-pair cable can be used for a spare in the event

either of the other two pair are damaged or fail. The cable shield should be tied to a

single-point Earth Ground on the controller end of the cable Refer to Figure 4-21.

Figure 4-21 RS-232 Cable Extension Diagram

RS–422 Interface

RS–422 interface signals are supplied by four wires from the Encompass 4 Reader

communications cable. Your host must have an RS–422 interface with either an inter-

nal or external converter.

Table 4-7 shows the RS–422 signals and their interface wires.

Table 4-7 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass 4

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass 4

Reader

Color Used

RS–422 Transmit positive Yellow/Red Yellow Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Red/Black Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Signal Ground

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-33

To connect the colored-wire cable using RS–422 interface

1. Connect the yellow wire (transmit +) from the yellow and red wire pair to the

host receive (+) signal.

2. Connect the red wire (transmit –) from the yellow and red wire pair to the host

receive (–) signal.

3. Connect the black wire (receive +) from the red and black wire pair to the host

transmit (+) signal.

4. Connect the red wire (receive –) from the red and black wire pair to the host

transmit (–) signal.

Wiegand Interface

Wiegand interface signals are supplied by three wires from the Encompass 4 Reader

communications cable. The Encompass 4 Reader with RS–232 or RS–422 comes with

the Wiegand option built in. The Wiegand interface can only be used by the reader to

output valid Wiegand tag reads. All reader commands and responses are issued

through the serial interface.

Table 4-8 shows the Wiegand signals and the interface wires.

Table 4-8 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass

4 Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4 Reader

Color Used

Wiegand Zero Output Blue/Red Blue Data0

Wiegand One Output Red Data1

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or black Ground

To connect Wiegand interface

1. Connect the blue wire (data0) from the blue and red wire pair to the data0 wire of

the Wiegand device.

2. Connect the red wire (data1) from the blue and red wire pair to the data1 wire of

the Wiegand device.

3. Connect either the yellow or black wire from the yellow and black pair to the

Wiegand device’s signal ground.

Note: The RS–232 or RS–422 interface is still included on the Encompass 4

Reader even when you use the Wiegand configuration. If serial communication is

not needed, TransCore recommends leaving the DB9 or DB25 connected to the

cable for future use.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-34

Note: When extending the Wiegand interface, use a three-pair cable such as Belden

2919. Use a twisted pair for the Red (Data1) with ground (Yellow of the Black and Yel-

low pair), and a twisted pair for Blue (Data0) with ground (Yellow of the Black and

Yellow pair). The third pair of the three-pair cable can be used for a spare in the event

either of the other two pair are damaged or fail. The cable shield should be tied to a

single-point Earth Ground on the controller end of the cable. Refer to Figure 4-22.

Figure 4-22 Wiegand Cable Extension Diagram

Warning

Do not cut the RS–232 red/black wires. If you cut the wires, you may not be able to

use them in the future for testing, setting frequency, or adding additional functions.

Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits

The Encompass 4 Reader has two sense input circuits and three sense output circuits

available. The sense input circuits can be used to notify the Encompass 4 Reader of

external events and are designed to be connected to a free-of-voltage dry contact.

Sense output circuits are single-pole, double-throw relays that provide normally

closed (NC) and normally open (NO) dry contacts. The relay contacts are rated at

42.2V AC peak (30 Vrms) or 60V DC at 1 A maximum. If controlling an external gate

or device requiring high current, an isolation transformer is required.

The following sections provide information to connect the sense input and sense out-

put circuits.

Sense Input Circuits

The Encompass 4 Reader supports two sense inputs – sense input0 and sense input1–

which requires two sense input lines for each loop sense or a total of four sense input

connections. Sense input0 is the presence detection device line and is used to control

RF power. As shown in Figure 4-23, sense input0 is through the red/green wire pair on

the I/O pigtail. The Encompass 4 Reader expects the sense input0 circuit to close

when a vehicle is present (i.e., a NO condition). The minimum presence true period is

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-35

fixed at 0 ms, which indicates that no delay occurs in closing the circuit when a vehi-

cle is present.

Sense input1 allows the Encompass 4 Reader to monitor the status of a peripheral

device. The host computer can then check the status by polling the Encompass 4

Reader.

Figure 4-23 Sample Circuit Connections

For Encompass 4 Readers that are used with IAG protocols, the NC sense output0

common is connected to the NO sense output0 common via a jumper providing a

return for sense output0 NC. Figure 4-24 shows this wiring.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-36

Figure 4-24 Sample Circuit Connections for IAG Installations

Sense Output Circuits

The Encompass 4 Reader supports three sets of sense output signals. Two sets – sense

output0 and sense output1 – provide NO or NC sense outputs. The third sense output

set is dedicated for testing and set up of the reader. It is defined as the TAG_LOCK

signal, which indicates a valid tag is in the read field.

These sense outputs are dry contacts that provide NO and NC sense outputs. The relay

contacts are rated at 42.2V AC peak (30 Vrms) or 60V DC at 1 A maximum. If con-

trolling an external gate or device requiring high current, an isolation transformer is

required.

As illustrated in Figure 4-23, sense output0, NC, is located on the orange/black pair.

Sense output0, NO, is located on the brown/black pair.

As shown in Figure 4-24, for IAG applications, Sense output0 NC, shares a common

return with sense output0 NO.

In Wiegand mode operation, the sense outputs are not controlled by a predefined out-

put mode.

Table 4-9 lists the cable descriptions and functions for the interface signals. These

wire pairs can be used or terminated based on the specific project applications and site

requirements.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-37

Using Table 4-9 as a guide to the functions of each of the wire signals, connect the

remaining wires to the appropriate terminal blocks on the terminal strip in the junction

box.

Table 4-9 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Blue/Red EBlue WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control

applications

FRed WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control

applications

White/

Red LWhite Lock Tag lock output,

active-closed Testing

maintenance

MRed Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/

Red NGreen Sense Input0 Sense Input0

(loop) Loop and

presence

detection

PRed Sense

Input0_RTN Sense Input0

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

Loop and

presence

detection

Blue/

Black RBlue Sense Input1 Sense Input1 General-purpose

sense input, not

used for detecting

presence

SBlack Sense

Input1_RTN Sense Input1

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not

used for detecting

presence

Brown/

Black TBlack Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched output to

control gate

UBrown Sense

Output0_NO Sense Output0

NO terminal Switched output to

control gate

Orange/

Black VBlack Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect

output), common

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-38

Caution

After connecting the wires in the communications cable, ground all drain wires

from the communications cable to the chassis ground in the NEMA enclosure.

Marking the Read Zone

The area where the Encompass 4 reads tags at the current RF range is called the read

Orange/

Black V** Black Sync_485_N RS–485 bus

negative Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization

bus

WOrange Sense

Output0_NC Sense Output0

NC terminal Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Green/

Black XBlack Sense

Output1_ COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

YGreen Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1

NO terminal Switched sense

output

White/

Black ZBlack Sense

Output1_ COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

White/

Black Z** Black Sync_485_P RS–485 bus

positive Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization

bus

aWhite Sense

Output1_NC Sense Output1

NC terminal Switched sense

output

Yellow/

Black bYellow GND Logic ground Signal ground

used with RS–232

and Wiegand

cBlack GND Logic ground Signal ground

used with RS–232

and Wiegand

**Use this synchronization pin designation if installing an Encompass 4 Reader that reads IAG

protocol tags. The part numbers for these readers are as follows:

10-4002-004; 10-4002-010; 10-4002-019; 10-4004-004; 10-4004-010; 10-4004-019;

10-4012-004; 10-4012-010; 10-4012-019; 10-4014-004; 10-4014-010; 10-4014-019;

Table 4-9 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments (continued)

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-39

zone. The antenna pattern, or read zone, of the Encompass 4 Reader would look

roughly like a pear-shaped balloon if you were able to see it. When installing the

Encompass 4 Reader, you should first mark the unit’s read zone using the RF range set

at the factory-default maximum. You can later adjust the read zone using the tech-

niques discussed in “Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-19.

If two Encompass 4 Readers are installed near each other, TransCore recommends that

you fine-tune each reader for the ideal read zone before connecting it permanently to

sense input/sense output and communications cables. A minimum of 2 MHz fre-

quency separation between the two adjacent readers is required for correct operation.

Required Materials

You need the following materials to mark the read zone:

•Test tags, supplied by the TransCore dealer or distributor

•Piece of windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 inches (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thick-

ness and approximately 12 inches (30.48 cm) square on which to attach the eGo

Plus Sticker Tag, eGo Plus Security Sticker Tag, or eGo WST

Caution

Both the eGo Plus Sticker Tag and eGo WST have a reduced read range when not

attached to glass.

•Audible circuit tester and 9V DC battery for circuit tester power as described in

the section “Bench Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page

4-13.

•Piece of chalk or roll of tape

•Plastic or wooden yardstick for ATA or IAG tags

•Vinyl electrical tape or hook-and-loop material

Procedures

Note: Using test tags that are not mounted to vehicles give a general idea of the read

pattern but the pattern will vary somewhat when actual vehicles with tags are tested.

Final adjustments must be made with tags properly mounted on a variety of vehicles.

To mark the read zone

1. Confirm the following:

• You have correctly connected the power supply as described “Connecting

the AC Power Supply” on page 4-9 and “Connecting the DC Power Supply”

on page 4-10.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-40

• You have correctly connected communications as described in “Connecting

Communications” on page 4-29.

• You have correctly connected sense input and sense output circuits as

described in “Connecting Sense Input and Sense Output Circuits” on page 4-

34.

2. Connect the red and white leads from the audible tester to the red and white pair

of wires from the Encompass 4 Reader power/communications cable.

3. Start the terminal emulation application Microsoft HyperTerminal by selecting

Programs>Accessories>Communications>HyperTerminal and press

ENTER.

4. In the HyperTerminal dialog boxes choose the com port to which the

communications interface is attached and set the properties as:

• Bits per second: 9600 baud

• Data bits: 8

• Parity: none

• Stop bits: 1

• Flow control: none

5. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4 Reader and ensure that the sign-on message

displays.

6. Input the following commands in the order provided in Table 4-5. Commands

include those to switch to command mode, set operational mode, turn on RF, and

return the reader to data mode.

7. Secure the ATA or IAG test tag to the end of the yardstick using electrical tape or

hook-and-loop material or affix the test eGo Plus or eGo WST to the glass. Be

sure the tag polarization (horizontal or vertical alignment) matches that of the

Encompass 4 Reader or antenna used. If using an eGo Plus-type test tag or eGo

WST, the glass should be in front of the tag (between the tag and the reader or

antenna).

8. Stand directly in front of and about 5 feet (1.5 m) away (see Figure 4-25) from

the Encompass 4 Reader or antenna. Hold the stick or the piece of glass so that

the tag is positioned at a height and angle consistent with a tag installed on a

vehicle. The test tag should cause the audible tester to sound.

Note: If you hold the test tag in your hand, your hand absorbs the RF signal and

the test results are not accurate.

9. Mark the spot with chalk or tape.

10. Move to the left until the sound stops and mark the ground with chalk or tape at

the location of the tag when the sound stopped.

11. Return to the center and then move to the right until the sound stops and mark the

ground with chalk or tape at the location of the tag when the sound stopped.

12. Return to the center and step backward 2 feet (0.6m) and repeat steps 5 through 7.

Installing the Encompass 4 Reader

4-41

13. Continue moving the tag in this manner, placing marks on the ground to identify

the boundary of the read zone each time the sound stops. Continue moving the

tag to various locations until the read zone is fully marked.

14. You can now connect the outer marks to draw the outer boundary of the read

zone.

Figure 4-25 is a view of a sample read zone within a controlled lane. The outer X

marks show the outside edges of the read zone.

Figure 4-25 Sample Read Zone Marking Pattern

15. Standing at the farthest point of the pattern, walk toward the Encompass 4 Reader

or antenna and listen for a continuous sound from the audible tester. If the sound

is not continuous, it could indicate a weak or “patchy” RF pattern. See “Fine-

Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-19 to adjust the read zone.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

4-42

-1

General Software Information

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

General Software Information

5-3

Chapter 5

General Software Information

This chapter provides software-related information for the Encompass

Reader System.

This chapter presents various software-related topics arranged in alphabetical order by

subject. In addition to this chapter, see Chapter Chapter 6, “Communications Proto-

cols,” and Chapter 7, “Commands for more information.

Command Entry Conventions

All Encompass 4 Reader commands are preceded by the start-of-message character

(#). The end-of-message sequence expected from the host is a carriage return (CR).

The Encompass 4 Reader terminates messages with a return and a line-feed (CR/LF).

For example, the command #01 Switch To Command Mode is typed as follows:

#01<ENTER>

where <ENTER> is the Enter or Return key.

Some command characters may be represented by the letter N. This letter indicates

you are to supply a value. Maximum valid entries are the numbers 0 through 9 and the

uppercase letters A through F. These letters allow for as many as 16 available user

responses and are based on the hexadecimal numbering system.

Commands have at least two characters following the # character. Table 5-1 shows the

basic structure of a four-character command.

Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure

#1005 Set Baud Rate To 9600 Baud

#All commands are preceded by the # character.

1Indicates the command group. This command is in Group 1-

Communications Port Control.

0Indicates the command subgroup. In this example, all commands with

a second digit of 0 apply to the main port.

0The command digit. In this example, the 0 indicates that this command

affects the baud rate.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

5-4

Command Response Conventions

Like the Encompass 4 Reader commands, responses are preceded by the # character.

Many Encompass 4 Reader commands respond with #Done or #Error indicating

the command was or was not recognized and completed. Other commands respond

with a four-character identifier followed by one or more values.

Table 5-2 shows an example of a command/reply sequence. This example assumes

that an Encompass 4 Reader with serial number SN97001P running version X.XX

software is connected to a PC running a terminal emulation software package such as

Windows Hyper Terminal or Procomm Plus. The command sequence verifies that

communications are working correctly.

Table 5-2 Sample Command Sequence

Entry Encompass 4 Reader Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches Encompass 4

Reader to command mode.

#505 <CR> #Model E4 Series Ver X.XX

SN08001P <CR/LF> Reports the software

version and serial number.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns Encompass 4

Reader to data mode.

In command discussions, Encompass 4 Reader response characters may be shown in

brackets < >. The use of brackets indicates that the response is a value in the range of

characters. The brackets are not part of the response. For example, the response to

command #520 Display Power Fail Bit is either a 0 or a 1. In the command discus-

sion, the response is shown as:

#PWRB <0-1>

with actual Encompass 4 Reader response being one of the following:

#PWRB 0

#PWRB 1

In this example, PWRB is the four-character identifier for power fail bit, and the 0 or 1

is the value. All spaces shown in the response are actual spaces sent from the Encom-

pass 4 Reader. In this example, one space is between the letter B and the number.

5Indicates the setting. Normally this is a variable and is usually a

hexadecimal value from 0 through F. In this example, 5 sets the baud

rate to 9600, the factory setting. In some commands, this digit may be

a four-place hexadecimal string or a character string.

Table 5-1 Four-Character Command Structure (continued)

#1005 Set Baud Rate To 9600 Baud

General Software Information

5-5

Operating Parameters

The Encompass 4 Readers maintain their operating parameters in non-volatile mem-

ory (NVRAM) so that the parameters are preserved after a power-down sequence.

Caution

To save user parameter changes to NVRAM, you must send command #00 before

powering down the reader.

Power Fail

The system maintains a power fail flag. The host transmits command #520 Display

Power Fail Bit to determine if a power down has occurred. This flag is cleared by both

command #63 Reset Reader and command #65 Reset Power Fail Bit.

Program Download

Program download stores the Encompass 4 applications software into the reader’s

flash memory. Program download is used to install program upgrades, add features,

and to recover from corrupted program data.

Note: Program download is a hosted process. Exercise caution so that you don’t inad-

vertently enter download mode.

Download Considerations

You should consider the following factors when performing program download:

•The Encompass 4 Reader does not process tags while in download mode.

•The Encompass 4 Reader does not accept any program data unless a successful

erase of flash memory has been performed before transmitting the data. Erasing

the flash memory typically takes two seconds.

•Exiting from download mode re-executes startup. If the new software has been

loaded without errors, the Encompass 4 Reader comes up in data mode. If a flash

checksum error is detected, the Encompass 4 Reader reenters download mode and

transmits a sign-on message with a boot version of 0.00x and without a serial

number.

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader uses default communications parameters when oper-

ating in download mode – 38400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, basic protocol

– and does not echo commands.

Download Procedures

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

5-6

If TransCore releases a new version of the Encompass 4 Reader software or if the

Encompass 4 Reader seems not to be working properly, you may need to download

the software to the Encompass 4 Reader. Contact technical support or your TransCore

Encompass 4 Reader sales representative.

Startup

Upon startup, Encompass 4 Reader’s transmit a sign-on message or a boot ROM fail-

ure message.

Sign-On Message

If startup is successful, the sign-on message appears as follows:

Model E4 Series [software version] SNYYYYYY



[Copyright notice]

where YYYYYY is the serial number assigned to the 4800 Reader unit being used.

Serial number 000000 is the default setting and is not a valid number. If this number

appears in the sign-on message, the serial number has never been stored into reader

memory. The serial number must be assigned by factory-authorized personnel using

command #695S...S Set Serial Number. Because only six digits are allowed in

the software, when setting the serial number skip the fourth (middle) digit of the

seven-digit number shown on the reader label.

If the flash memory checksum does not indicate verification, the sign-on message

appears as follows:

Model [E4] Ver 0.00x

[Copyright notice]

Boot Failure Message

The software performs a checksum function on itself. The function returns a specific

value for the particular version of software. If the value returned is not correct, the

boot ROM checksum assumes that locations have been corrupted and a failure condi-

tion exists. If the boot ROM checksum is not correct, a boot failure message is trans-

mitted. If the failure message does not transmit, a communications error has occurred

or the boot failed to the extent that it cannot transmit the failure message.

If the failure message version number equals 0.00 and no serial number exists, the

flash memory checksum has failed, and the Encompass 4 Reader is operating out of

boot ROM. In this case, the Encompass 4 Reader automatically enters download mode

and waits for a new program to be loaded into the flash memory. Follow the instruc-

tions in “Program Download” on page 5-5 to download a new program.

General Software Information

5-7

Tag/Message Buffer

In basic communication protocol, the Encompass 4 Reader does not provide tag mem-

ory storage beyond the quantity required for uniqueness checking. This feature allows

adequate buffering of tag data under normal operating conditions. The Encompass 4

Reader cannot operate as a stand-alone component. When the buffer fills, subsequent

tag IDs will be lost.

In error correcting protocol (ECP), a buffer of up to three additional tag reads will be

held in case a host system is unable to acknowledge tag reads in real time.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

5-8

-1

Communications Protocols

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Communications Protocols

6-3

Chapter 6

Communications Protocols

This chapter describes the communications protocols for the

Encompass® 4 Reader.

Introduction

The Encompass 4 Reader supports the following communications protocols:

•Basic

•Error correcting protocol (ECP)

•Data inquiry

The following protocol information provides reference information relevant to devel-

oping host software.

Communications are performed using the 7-bit ASCII code with optional parity, thus

providing easy setup, testing, and diagnostics with standard ASCII terminals and

serial printers. Parity must be enabled to achieve the specified undetected error rate.

Each message is framed within the start-of-message (som) and end-of-message (eom)

characters so that the host computer can detect the beginning and end of each mes-

sage. This convention is most important under marginal communications conditions

during which the host may receive extraneous noise-induced characters between

reader transmissions. In such instances, the host is capable of ignoring any messages

that do not conform to the som...eom frame sequence.

Both data mode and command mode require a two-way message interchange is when

using ECP. This interchange is completed by the message recipient returning a mes-

sage acknowledgement to the message sender.

With ECP, all transmissions require a message. If a message is not received, the sender

will time out with the same effect as if it had received a negative acknowledgment

(from the host) or an Error message from the Encompass 4 Reader.

Software (XON/XOFF) flow control is optionally supported. Be careful in the use of

XON/XOFF since noise-induced characters may be interpreted by the Encompass 4

Reader as the XOFF character, which would suspend reader output without informa-

tion reaching the host computer. For more information see “Software Flow Control”

on page 8-19.

Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using

ECP.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-4

Basic Protocol

With basic protocol, messages sent to and from the Encompass 4 Reader and the host

are transmitted without error checking. For each host transmission, the Encompass 4

Reader returns a Done or Error message to the host.

When the host computer is physically close to the Encompass 4 Reader and no sources

of interference exist, the basic protocol provides reliable communications.

The host must be ready to receive reader-transmitted messages because in basic proto-

col the Encompass 4 Reader does not wait for the host to acknowledge a message

before transmitting the next message. If necessary, the host may halt reader transmis-

sions by using software or hardware flow control. Refer to Chapter 8 for flow control

information.

Error Correcting Protocol

When the quality of data communications is imperative or may be suspect, you can

invoke ECP to ensure the integrity of data transmitted between the Encompass 4

Reader and the host.

Note: TransCore recommends that basic protocol (not ECP) be used when commands

are entered manually at the keyboard.

Wiegand output is automatically disabled when the reader is put into ECP mode.

Error correction is accomplished with the use of a cyclic redundancy check (CRC)

value that is based on the message data. The originator (reader or host) calculates the

CRC value of a message and includes it in the transmitted message.

The recipient (reader or host) also calculates a CRC value for the received message. If

the transmitted message data is correct, the CRC value calculated by the recipient will

agree with the CRC value calculated by the originator. If the CRC values do not agree,

the recipient rejects the message.

Message sequence numbers are also included when using ECP. These sequence num-

bers are checked to determine if the message received has the correct sequence num-

ber; if not, the recipient rejects the message.

Since the seven-bit ASCII code is used and there are eight data bits per character, the

eighth bit can optionally be used to support parity. Where parity is selected, the CRC

value calculation includes the parity of each character in the calculation of the CRC

value.

Parity is required to achieve the most reliable communications. If parity is enabled,

both the Encompass 4 Reader and the host must issue a message if any received char-

acter has a parity error. However, the message must not be transmitted before receipt

of the eom character. In this case, the Encompass 4 Reader will issue an Error mes-

sage, and the host computer will issue a negative acknowledgment message.

Communications Protocols

6-5

Data Inquiry Protocol

Data inquiry protocol is a basic protocol option that allows the host to control

transmission of reader tag data. The selection of data inquiry protocol affects data

mode operation. As the Encompass 4 Reader acquires tags, it buffers them but does

not transmit them. Instead, the host must poll the Encompass 4 Reader for each tag by

sending a CTRL-E character (hex 5 digit). The Encompass 4 Reader transmits one

message (tag ID or report data) for each CTRL-E it receives until the buffer is empty.

Each tag request message sent by the host consists only of the CTRL-E character; no

som or eom characters are sent. Encompass 4 Reader data transmission (tag ID and

report data) format is the same as for basic protocol.

Selection of data inquiry protocol does not affect command mode operation.

Basic Protocol and ECP Format

Note: In the following text, the symbols < and > are used to represent required vari-

able message data, and the symbols [and] are used to represent optional data. These

symbols are not part of the message syntax.

Reader Transmissions

The basic protocol format and the data inquiry protocol format are as follows:

The ECP format is as follows:

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number (ASCII hex) that represents an even number in

the range 0–9, A–F (0, 2, 4, 6, 8, A, C, E). The Encompass 4

Reader maintains the number. The host must acknowledge reader

transmissions by sending an ACK message with the same

sequence number received from the Encompass 4 Reader. The

Encompass 4 Reader updates its sequence number upon receipt of

a valid host ACK. If an ACK is not received, the Encompass 4

Reader retransmits the message. A reader transmission sequence

is not considered complete until the Encompass 4 Reader receives

an ACK and updates its sequence number.

<data> An ASCII string up to 72 characters long. This string may contain

tag data, a presence without tag report; an input status change

report; an Error06, Error07, Error08, or Error11

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-6

message; or a sign-on message. Auxiliary data may also be

included.

<crc> Field containing four ASCII digits that represent the 16-bit CRC

value calculated on the message. The CRC value is calculated on

bytes between the som character and the first <crc> byte.

When the host receives a properly framed message, it can

calculate a 16-bit CRC value. The calculation is applied to the

character string that immediately follows the <som> and that

ends with the character immediately preceding the first <crc>

character.

The transmitted CRC value can then be compared with the binary

equivalent of the received <crc> characters. If the transmitted

and received CRC values do not match, the recipient assumes the

message was received in error, and transmits a NAK message

response.

<eom> End-of-message characters (ASCII CR and LF). The system

includes both a carriage return (CR) and line feed (LF) to

facilitate the use of terminals and printers.

If the host receives a <som> character in the middle of a data

message, the message in progress is aborted. The assumption is

that an <eom> was lost and the Encompass 4 Reader is in the

process of retransmitting the previous message.

ECP Host ACK/NAK Response

With ECP, the host computer responds to all data message transmissions from the

Encompass 4 Reader using the following acknowledgment or negative acknowledg-

ment response format.

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> An echo of the sequence number received from the Encompass 4

Reader. The sequence number should correspond to the data

message that is being positively or negatively acknowledged by

the host. If the Encompass 4 Reader receives an ACK message

with the incorrect sequence number, the data message is

retransmitted.

Communications Protocols

6-7

The host computer resets the anticipated data message sequence

number to that of the Encompass 4 Reader before

communications can resume without error.

<ack/nak> ASCII @ character for ACK response; ASCII ? character for NAK

response

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

The Encompass 4 Reader sets a user-programmable timeout delay at the time each

message is transmitted based on command #612NN Set Error Correcting Protocol

Timeout, where NN = timeout delay. To disable the timeout delay for diagnostic pur-

poses, issue the command #612FF Disable Error Correcting Protocol Timeout.

If the timeout delay expires before the Encompass 4 Reader receives an ACK or NAK

message from the host, a logical NAK condition will be declared. If the Encompass 4

Reader receives a NAK or timeout, the reader retransmits the data message.

When the Encompass 4 Reader receives an ACK message, the system software treats

the message as having been properly received by the host. The software increments

the sequence number, and advances pointers to the next message in the Encompass 4

Reader’s message queue to prepare for sending the next message.

Switch to Command Mode Request

The host computer may issue command #01 Switch to Command Mode while in data

mode.

The basic protocol format is as follows:

The ECP format is as follows:

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number generated by the host computer separately

from that appearing in data messages transmitted by the

Encompass 4 Reader

<cmd> Switch to command mode (ASCII characters 01)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-8

Host Transmission

The host computer initiates synchronous communications between the Encompass 4

Reader and the host. The host begins a sequence by issuing a command; the Encom-

pass 4 Reader responds accordingly.

The data inquiry protocol format is as follows:

<CTRL-E>

The basic protocol format is as follows:

The ECP format is as follows:

where

<CTRL-E> ASCII Control E (hex 5 digit). When in data inquiry mode, each

transmission of a CTRL-E by the host causes the Encompass 4

Reader to transmit one tag ID.

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Sequence number (ASCII hex digit) that represents an odd

number in the range 0–9, A–F (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, B, D, F). The host

should use odd sequence numbers in its command since the

Encompass 4 Reader uses even sequence numbers in its

transmissions. This method eliminates the possibility of a

synchronous host command and an asynchronous reader

transmission having the same sequence number.

Upon receiving a host command in ECP, the Encompass 4 Reader

replies using the command’s sequence number in its response.

Therefore, the host computer updates its sequence number upon

receipt of a valid reader message. If the sequence number is not

updated before transmission of the next command, the

Encompass 4 Reader will not service the new command; it will

retransmit its previous message. A command/message sequence

is not complete until the host updates its sequence number.

<cmd> Command code, a string that contains from two to four ASCII

hex characters

[<data>] Optional data field, an ASCII string of as many as 20 characters

in length. For example, the store hardware configuration string

command is #696S...S or command #696 Store Hardware

Configuration String followed by the data string S...S.

<crc> CRC value for the message

Communications Protocols

6-9

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR)

Reader Command Response

The basic protocol format is

The ECP format is

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-10

where

<som> Start-of-message (ASCII # character)

<seq> Echo of sequence number received in host command message

<resp> Response string. The Encompass 4 Reader returns Done,

Error, or another ASCII string depending on the host

transmission. This string can be up to 72 characters long.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character (ASCII CR and LF)

Sample Messages

This section contains examples of typical messages transmitted between the Encom-

pass 4 Reader and the host computer.

Reader Transmissions

Basic protocol reader transmission

#KING 1302<eom>

Host response

No host response for non-ECP

ECP reader transmission

#4KING 1302 <crc><eom>

where

#Start-of-message character

4Message sequence number

KING 1302 Message data: Tag ID is shown. 

Other sample message data could be as follows:

IOST C0 O2 I0 D24 (display I/O status)

Error06 (frequency not set)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Host response

#4@<crc><eom>

where

Communications Protocols

6-11

#Start-of-message character

4Message sequence number

@ ACK (acknowledgment character)

(? returned for a negative acknowledgment)

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Host Command Transmissions

Basic protocol host transmission

#647XXX<eom>

Reader response

#Done<eom> or #Error<eom>

#Error<eom> is returned if the host transmission is not a legal command with legal

data.

ECP host transmission

#7647XXX<crc><eom>

where

#Start-of-message character

7Message sequence number

647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency command where

647XXX is the command and XXX is a hexadecimal value from

000 to 118. In this example, XXX sets the RF frequency to 903

MHz.

<crc> CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

Done Command has been invoked by the Encompass 4 Reader

Reader response

#7Done<crc><eom> or #7Error<eom>

For some commands, the Encompass 4 Reader responds with data that relates to the

command, such as T0F 0, to indicate Wiegand mode enabled for a #532 Display Wie-

gand Mode Status command.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-12

#7Error<eom> will be returned if host transmission is not a legal command with

legal data.

Timing and Synchronization

The ECP is largely independent of baud rate. The timeout delays previously described

are a function of baud rate.

The Encompass 4 Reader supports an ECP timeout, which applies equally to both

transmit and receive.

The receiver’s minimum timeout delay equals the time to transmit/receive the longest

anticipated message at the current baud rate setting. Additional margin should be

included for idle periods between characters; for example, processing overhead, if

any. The timeout delay period can be expressed as follows:

rec (ms) = L x [char + idle]

where

char (ms) 1000 x [ Bc / Rb ]

BcBits per character, typically 10

RbBaud rate, 1200–38.4 K

LLength of message in characters

idle Maximum idle period between characters (ms)

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader supports baud rates between 1200 and 38.4 K.

Likewise, the sender must set a timeout delay equal to the delay of nine characters at

the current baud rate setting. For example, the time required to shift out the <eom>

character plus the time to shift in the ACK or NAK message to be received plus a pro-

cessing allowance for the receiver to process the message and check for error condi-

tions.

Thus, the sending timeout delay can be expressed as follows:

send (ms) = 9 * char + errchk

where

errckh (ms) Processing period to perform error checking by receiver

The host computer can remotely set the Encompass 4 Reader’s communications

parameters while in the command mode, but TransCore does not recommend this

action if communications conditions are marginal.

After the Encompass 4 Reader receives new communications parameters, the Encom-

Communications Protocols

6-13

pass 4 Reader issues the Done message and switches to the new configuration imme-

diately. The host computer switches its communications parameters immediately after

the transaction is complete.

As noted, the message initiator, such as the Encompass 4 Reader in data mode and the

host computer in command mode, starts a timeout counter at the time a message is

transmitted. If the timeout expires before receiving an acknowledgement message, a

logical NAK condition is declared, and the initiator assumes the message was received

in error. In this instance, the message is retransmitted until an acknowledgement mes-

sage is received.

The message recipient, such as the host computer in data mode and the Encompass 4

Reader in command mode, starts a timeout counter when a <som> character is

received. If the timeout expires without the receipt of an <eom>, the message acqui-

sition is aborted (reset), and the receiver waits for the next <som> character.

If the message recipient receives a second <som> character before an <eom> charac-

ter, the message acquisition is aborted (reset), and retransmission of the previous mes-

sage is assumed to be underway.

These strategies allow for recovery during periods when communications are marginal

or completely lost.

Note: It is important that the host computer limit the period during which the Encom-

pass 4 Reader remains in command mode to avoid losing tag IDs. RF is off in com-

mand mode and no tags can be read.

Reader-Addressed Failure Conditions

The Encompass 4 Reader addresses the following failure conditions.

Illegal Sequence Number (not in the range 0–9, A–F)

If the Encompass 4 Reader detects an illegal sequence number in a host command

message, it discards the received message and sends no response. If it receives an ille-

gal sequence number in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had been received

and retransmits the data.

Wrong Sequence Number

If the Encompass 4 Reader receives the wrong sequence number in an ACK message,

it responds as if a NAK had been received, and it retransmits the data.

Incorrect CRC

If the Encompass 4 Reader detects an incorrect CRC value in a host command mes-

sage, it discards the received message. No response is sent. If it receives an incorrect

CRC value in an ACK message, it responds as if a NAK had been received, and it

retransmits the data.

Illegal Command

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-14

If the Encompass 4 Reader receives an illegal command, it returns its standard Error

message.

Communications Protocols

6-15

Transmission Timeout

If the Encompass 4 Reader transmits an asynchronous message and the host does not

send an ACK before the ECP timeout occurs, the Encompass 4 Reader retransmits the

message.

Receive Timeout

If the Encompass 4 Reader receives a <som> but does not receive a matching <eom>

before the ECP timeout occurs, it discards the incomplete message and resets its

receiver.

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision

If the Encompass 4 Reader transmits asynchronous data at the same time that the host

sends a command, the Encompass 4 Reader gives priority to receiving the command.

It processes the command and sends a message before it retransmits the asynchronous

data.

Host-Addressed Failure Conditions

The host computer addresses the following failure conditions.

Illegal or Wrong Sequence Number

If the host detects an illegal or wrong sequence number in a reader response, it retrans-

mits the command with the same sequence number. If the host detects an illegal

sequence number in an asynchronous reader transmission, it sends a NAK message.

Incorrect CRC

If the host detects an incorrect CRC value in a reader message, it retransmits the com-

mand with the same sequence number. If the host detects an incorrect CRC value in an

asynchronous reader transmission, it transmits a NAK message.

Transmission Timeout

If the Encompass 4 Reader does not respond to a host command within a specified

interval, the host software retransmits the command with the same sequence number.

Receive Timeout

If the host receives a <som> but does not receive a matching <eom> within a specified

timeout interval, it discards the incomplete message and resets its receiver.

Asynchronous Message/Command Message Collision

If the host receives an asynchronous reader transmission at the same time it transmits

a command, it ignores the asynchronous message and waits for the Encompass 4

Reader’s response. The Encompass 4 Reader retransmits asynchronous data after it

transmits the command message.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-16

ECP Reliability

An undetected error is defined as a message having incorrect data or status but no par-

ity or CRC errors. An error transaction is defined as a message having either a parity

or CRC error. Laboratory testing indicates an undetected error rate of less than one

undetected error per 1,000,000 error transactions with parity enabled.

To ensure this error rate is not exceeded, the host must enable parity and adhere

closely to the timing specifications discussed previously in this chapter in the “Timing

and Synchronization” section.

CRC Calculation

The CRC used by the ECP is based on a 16-bit algorithm. The algorithm, as imple-

mented, operates on eight-bit characters, for example, seven-bit ASCII character plus

one optional parity bit. The 16-bit result is converted to four ASCII hex characters and

is appended to messages transmitted by the Encompass 4 Reader.

The Encompass 4 Reader accepts four ASCII < ` > characters (60 hex) as a wild card

CRC value in lieu of a valid four-character CRC value to facilitate testing and diag-

nostic checkout.

The Encompass 4 Reader implements the algorithm with a 512-byte lookup table to

reduce the processing overhead requirements.

To simplify the implementation of the CRC algorithm by host software developers,

several examples of the calculation are provided in C source code on the following

pages. The calculation may be performed with or without a lookup table, depending

on the trade-off between code memory and processing overhead.

Example 1 presents an example of a function (CALCCRC) that calculates the CRC

value through a call to a separate function (UPDCRC).

unsigned short calccrc(char *message)

{

unsigned short crc = 0;

for ( ; *message != (char)0;message++)

crc = updcrc(*message & 0xff, crc);

return (crc)

}

Example 2 shows an example of UPDCRC that does not require a lookup table.

#define BITS_PER_CHAR 8

unsigned short updcrc (unsigned short ch, unsigned short

crc)

{

while (--counter >= 0)

if (temp & 0x8000) {

temp <<= 1;

temp += (((ch <<= 1) & 0x0100) != 0);

temp ^= 0x1021;

}

else {

temp <<= 1;

temp += (((ch <<= 1) & 0x0100) != 0);

}

return(temp);

}

Communications Protocols

6-17

Example 3 contains an example of UPDCRC that does require a lookup table.

#define updcrc(cp, crc)( crctab[((crc >> 8) & 255)]^ (crc << 8) ^ cp

static unsigned short crctab [256] = {

0x0000, 0x1021, 0x2042, 0x3063, 0x4048, 0x50a5, 0x60c6, 0x70e7,

0x8108, 0x9129, 0xa14a, 0xb16b, 0xc18c, 0xd1ad, 0xe1ce, 0xf1ef,

0x1231, 0x0210, 0x3273, 0x2252, 0x52b5, 0x4294, 0x72f7, 0x62d6,

0x9339, 0x8318, 0xb37b, 0xa35a, 0xd3bd, 0xc39c, 0xf3ff, 0xe3de,

0x2462, 0x3443, 0x0420, 0x1401, 0x64e6, 0x74c7, 0x44a4, 0x5485,

0xa56a, 0xb54b, 0x8528, 0x9509, 0xe5ee, 0xf5cf, 0xc5ac, 0xd58d,

0x3653, 0x2672, 0x1611, 0x0630, 0x76d7, 0x66f6, 0x5695, 0x46b4,

0xb75b, 0xa77a, 0x9719, 0x8738, 0xf7df, 0xe7fe, 0xd79d, 0xc7bc,

0x48c4, 0x58e5, 0x6886, 0x78a7, 0x0840, 0x1861, 0x2802, 0x3823,

0xc9cc, 0xd9ed, 0xe98e, 0xf9af, 0x8948, 0x9969, 0xa90a, 0xb92b,

0x5af5, 0x4ad4, 0x7ab7, 0x6a96, 0x1a71, 0x0a50, 0x3a33, 0x2a12,

0xdbfd, 0xcbdc, 0xfbbf, 0xeb9e, 0x9b79, 0x8b58, 0xbb3b, 0xab1a,

0x6ca6, 0x7c87, 0x4ce4, 0x5cc5, 0x2c22, 0x3c03, 0x0c60, 0x1c41,

0xedae, 0xfd8f, 0xcdec, 0xddcd, 0xad2a, 0xbd0b, 0x8d68, 0x9d49,

0x7e97, 0x6eb6, 0x5ed5, 0x4ef4, 0x3e13, 0x2e32, 0x1e51, 0x0e70,

0xff9f, 0xefbe, 0xdfdd, 0xcffc, 0xbf1b, 0xaf3a, 0x9f59, 0x8f78,

0x9188, 0x81a9, 0xb1ca, 0xa1eb, 0xd10c, 0xc12d, 0xf14e, 0xe16f,

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-18

Example 4 shows an example of a function that creates the lookup table.

#include <stdio.h>

#define MAX_CHAR 256

#define BITS_CHAR 8

#define SIGN_BIT 0x8000

#define POLY 0x1021

unsigned short crctab [MAX_CHAR];

main ()

{

unsigned short ch;

unsigned short workval;

unsigned short bit;

unsigned short carry;

for (ch = 0; ch != MAX_CHAR; ch++) {

workval = ch << BITS_CHAR;

for (bit = BITS_CHAR; bit != 0; bit--) {

carry = (workval & SIGN_BIT);

workval <<= 1;

if (carry)

workval ^= POLY;

}

crctab[ch] = workval;

0x1080, 0x00a1, 0x30c2, 0x20e3, 0x5004, 0x4025, 0x7046, 0x6067,

0x83b9, 0x9398, 0xa3fb, 0xb3da, 0xc33d, 0xd31c, 0xe37f, 0xf35e,

0x02b1, 0x1290, 0x22f3, 0x32d2, 0x4235, 0x5214, 0x6277, 0x7256,

0xb5ea, 0xa5cb, 0x95a8, 0x8589, 0xf56e, 0xe54f, 0xd52c, 0xc50d,

0x34e2, 0x24c3, 0x14a0, 0x0481, 0x7466, 0x6447, 0x5424, 0x4405,

0xa7db, 0xb7fa, 0x8799, 0x97b8, 0xe75f, 0xf77e, 0xc71d, 0xd73c,

0x26d3, 0x36f2, 0x0691, 0x16b0, 0x6657, 0x7676, 0x4615, 0x5634,

0xd94c, 0xc96d, 0xf90e, 0xe92f, 0x99c8, 0x89e9, 0xb98a, 0xa9ab,

0x5844, 0x4865, 0x7806, 0x6827, 0x18c0, 0x08e1, 0x3882, 0x28a3,

0xcb7d, 0xdb5c, 0xeb3f, 0xfb1e, 0x8bf9, 0x9bd8, 0xabbb, 0xbb9a,

0x4a75, 0x5a54, 0x6a37, 0x7a16, 0x0af1, 0x1ad0, 0x2ab3, 0x3a92,

0xfd2e, 0xed0f, 0xdd6c, 0xcd4d, 0xbdaa, 0xad8b, 0x9de8, 0x8dc9,

0x7c26, 0x6c07, 0x5c64, 0x4c45, 0x3ca2, 0x2c83, 0x1ce0, 0x0cc1,

0xef1f, 0xff3e, 0xcf5d, 0xdf7c, 0xaf9b, 0xbfba, 0x8fd9, 0x9ff8,

0x6e17, 0x7e36, 0x4e55, 0x5e74, 0x2e93, 0x3eb2, 0x0ed1, 0x1ef0,

};

Communications Protocols

6-19

}

for (ch = 0; ch != MAX_CHAR; ch++)

printf("0x%04x\n", crctab[ch]);

}

Manually Disabling ECP for Maintenance

Under certain conditions, communications between the host and Encompass 4 Reader

may be lost temporarily and maintenance may be required. The reader or host is send-

ing out a message and waiting for an acknowledgment. When the acknowledgment is

not received, the message is sent again. Additional messages are also buffered. Often

the first indication that the Encompass 4 Reader software is in an ECP “loop” is when

the user/technician sees a recurring display of the same message repeated over and

over again on the monitor. The procedure described in the following paragraphs

enables the maintenance technician to change configuration or test tag reading manu-

ally.

Assuming that the ECP timeout is at the factory default of 12.7 seconds (or other value

that allows enough time for the commands to be manually entered) the following com-

mand sequence may be used to break out of an ECP loop. This command sequence

uses four ASCII < ` > characters (60 hex) as wild card CRC values.

Note: The ASCII <`> character (60 hex) is commonly located on the ~ key.

You must acknowledge existing messages by issuing commands with the generic for-

mat:

#x@‘‘‘‘<eom>

where

#Start-of-message character

xMessage sequence number. This must be the same as the

sequence number of the message being acknowledged

@ACK (acknowledgment character)

<‘‘‘‘> Wild card CRC value for the message

<eom> End-of-message character

The following is a typical sequence after power-on limiting buffered messages.

Note: Ensure that no tags are in the field when you are performing this troubleshoot-

ing procedure.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader that uses an external antenna, ensure

that you have connected the antenna or a dummy load to the reader before applying

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

6-20

power to the reader.

Reader transmission on power-up:

#0 Model …. SN <crc><eom>

Manually enter: #0@````<eom>

Manually enter: #2@````<eom>

Manually enter: #101‘‘‘‘<eom> this puts reader into command mode

Reader response: #1Done<crc><eom>

Manually enter: #3610‘‘‘‘<eom> this puts reader into basic protocol,

disabling ECP

reader response: Done

Enter any other desired diagnostic or directive commands in basic protocol. After

maintenance is complete enter the command:

#00 to return the reader to data mode

#611 to return to error correcting protocol,

and then either cycle power or issue

#100````<eom> command to return

reader to data mode

-1

Commands

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Commands

7-3

Chapter 7

Commands

This chapter discusses the host-transmitted commands that are used to

control the Encompass® 4 Reader configuration and operation.

Introduction

The Encompass 4 Reader is delivered from the factory with specified default settings

that determine how the reader operates. Commands transmitted by the host computer

can change the default settings and control additional features. The commands can be

transmitted by manually entering the commands at the host keyboard if the host is in

terminal emulation mode. The Encompass 4 Reader can also communicate with

ASCII terminals.

Note: If you are using Wiegand mode, you must connect the PC or laptop to the

Encompass 4 Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface and a terminal emulation

program to send commands to the reader. You can leave the Wiegand interface con-

nected during this procedure.

Operating Modes

The Encompass 4 Reader has three modes of operation: data mode, command mode,

and download mode. The software for the Encompass 4 Reader contains two separate

programs — boot and application. The boot program has control of the Encompass 4

Reader on startup and when operating in download mode. The application program

has control of the Encompass 4 Reader during data mode and command mode opera-

tion and holds the application code. Together, they control the Encompass 4 Reader in

the three modes of operation.

Data Mode

The Encompass 4 Reader is in the data mode upon power-up. While in the data mode,

the Encompass 4 Reader sends all communications as data messages, such as tag IDs

and reports, to the host computer. Reports provide information on input status changes

(input0 and input1), a presence without tag report, and buffer overflow information.

The host computer can send only two commands to the Encompass 4 Reader while in

data mode:

•Command #01 Switch To Command Mode changes the Encompass 4 Reader

from the data mode to the command mode. See “01 Switch to Command Mode”

on page 7-5.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-4

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader transmits ID codes to the host computer when the

Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode. If the Encompass 4 Reader remains in the com-

mand mode with tags passing through the read zone, all tag IDs are not reported.

Command Mode

While the Encompass 4 Reader is in the command mode, the host computer sends

commands to the Encompass 4 Reader that can be used to control the operation and

configuration of the reader. After the Encompass 4 Reader receives a command, it

transmits a command response message. Typically, the command message

contains Error, Done, or data relating specifically to the command request. These

messages may be of variable length since some commands require information as part

of the message; for example, Display Wiegand Mode Status.

Communications can be lost if the host computer attempts to send certain commands

under marginal communications conditions. For example, if the host computer trans-

mits the command request to change the baud rate and the Encompass 4 Reader prop-

erly receives the request and transmits the Done message, one of the two following

conditions may occur:

•If the host computer receives the Done message, then both the host and the

Encompass 4 Reader switch to the new baud rate, and communications are main-

tained.

Note: In many applications, the host must be set to the new baud rate as it will not

change automatically.

Note: The Encompass 4 Reader changes the baud rate immediately after issuing the

Done message.

•However, if the host does not receive the Done message transmitted by the

Encompass 4 Reader, the host assumes that the command was not properly sent

and does not switch to the new baud rate, causing a loss of communications.

Caution

The host computer should not attempt to change communications parameters or

protocols during marginal communications conditions; otherwise, a loss of commu-

nications can result.

Download Mode

In download mode, the Encompass 4 Reader allows the host to download new soft-

ware.

While in download mode, the reader communications port parameters are fixed at the

following factory-default settings: 38400 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, soft-

ware flow control (XON/XOFF), basic protocol.

While in download mode, the Encompass 4 Reader turns RF off, does not process

Commands

7-5

tags, and does not echo host commands.

Command List

Reader commands are divided into groups based on primary function. The following

sections provide information about each command in command number order. Refer

to Appendix D for listings of commands in numerical and alphabetical order.

In the following text, the symbols < and > represent variable message data. These

symbols are not part of the message syntax.

Hex digits (0–9, A–F) in either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used in data

strings and for hex digits A–F.

Reader Mode Control — Command Group 0

Group 0 commands control reader mode. The mode determines whether the reader is

transmitting data to or receiving data from a host computer or terminal.

00 Switch to Data Mode (Factory Default)

Command #00 switches the reader to data mode, which allows the reader to transmit

tag data (ID codes) to the host. In addition to switching the reader to data mode, com-

mand #00 automatically saves to non-volatile memory (NVRAM) any user parame-

ters that had been changed during the command mode session. The reader enters data

mode on power up.

Caution

To save user parameter changes to NVRAM, you must send command #00 before

powering down the reader.

While operating in data mode, the reader accepts the following commands:

•Command #01 Switch to Command Mode

Reader response:

Done

01 Switch to Command Mode

Command #01 switches the reader to command mode, which allows the reader to

accept commands from a host or terminal. While in command mode, the reader turns

RF off and does not acquire tags.

Reader response:

Done

Communications Port Control — Command

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-6

Group 1

Group 1 commands configure the parameters used by the Encompass 4 Reader to

communicate with a host computer or terminal. These commands set baud rate, stop

bits, parity, and end-of-line delay.

100N Select Baud Rate

Command #100N selects the reader baud rate. The factory-default setting is 9600

baud. The N variable specifies the baud rate shown in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Select Baud Rate Commands

Command Baud Rate Selected

1002 1200

1003 2400

1004 4800

1005 9600 (factory default)

1006 19.2 K

1007 38.4 K

Caution

If ECP is enabled, ensure that the ECP timeout is sufficient for the new baud rate.

See “Timing and Synchronization” on page 6-12.

Reader response:

Done

101N Select Stop Bits

Command #101N selects the number of stop bits for reader character transmission.

The factory default setting is 1 stop bit. The N variable specifies the number of stop

bits as indicated in Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Select Stop Bits Commands

Command Stop Bits Selected

1010 1 (factory default)

1011 2

Reader response:

Commands

7-7

Done

102N Select Parity

Command #102N selects the reader parity setting. The factory-default setting is par-

ity disabled. The N variable specifies parity as shown in Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Select Parity Commands

Command Data Bits Parity Selected

1020 8Disable parity (factory default)

1021 7Select even parity

1022 7Select odd parity

Reader response:

Done

Command Group 2

Group 2 commands control the real-time clock which maintains the Encompass 4

internal time and date. This time and date can be appended to IDs, error messages, and

sensor input reports. An internal battery supports the clock, so time and date are

preserved if main power is lost.

20 Set Time

Command #20 sets the time. Enter the time in the proper format: two-digit decimal

entries with no spaces between characters and using colons as

delimiters. The entry format is as follows:

20HH:MM:SS or 20HH:MM:SS:hh

where

HH represents hours (00 to 23).

MM represents minutes (00 to 59).

SS represents seconds (00 to 59).

hh represents hundredths of a second (00 to 99).

:is the time delimiter.

If hundredths of a second is not specified, the reader sets the hundredths register to 00.

Reader response:

Done

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-8

21 Set Date

Command #21 sets the date. Enter the date in the proper format: two-digit decimal

entries with no spaces between characters and using forward slashes “/” as delimiters.

The entry format is as follows:

21MM/DD/YY

where

MM represents the month (01 to 12).

DD represents the day (01 to 31).

YY represents the last two digits of the year (00 to 99).

/is the date delimiter.

Reader response:

Done

22 Display Time and Date

Command #22 displays the reader’s current time and date. One space separates the

time and the date output.

Reader message:

HH:MM:SS.hh MM/DD/YY

where

HH represents hours.

MM represents minutes.

SS represents seconds.

hh represents hundredths of seconds.

:is the time delimiter.

MM represents the month.

DD represents the day.

YY represents the last two digits of the year.

/is the date delimiter.

Append Information — Command Group 3

Group 3 commands append useful information to reader transmissions, such as IDs,

error messages, and sensor input reports. Auxiliary information such as reader num-

ber, antenna number (or manual entry code), number of times the previous tag was

read, and sensor input status can be appended to the ID using the Group 3 commands.

30N Append Time and Date Selection

Commands

7-9

Command #30N selects the option of appending the time and date to transmitted IDs,

error messages, presence without tag reports, and input status change reports. The

factory default setting is time and date appended (command #302).

The reader returns an Error message if its tag buffer contains data. The reset reader

command #63 may be transmitted to clear the buffer; however, tag ID data will not be

reported. If this is unacceptable, allow the buffer to empty before re-issuing append

time and date command #30N. Append Time and Date commands are shown in Table

7-4

Table 7-4 Append Time and Date Commands

Command Append Option

300 No time and date appended

302 Time and date appended (factory default)

The reader transmits messages with time and date appended as follows. One space

separates the time from the date.

where

string is a tag ID, error message, or report.

& separates <string> from the time and date.

HH:MM:SS is the time delimiter.

MM/DD/YY is the date delimiter.

Reader response:

Done

31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection

Command #31N selects the option of appending auxiliary information to transmitted

IDs, presence-without-tag reports, and input status change reports. Auxiliary informa-

tion is not appended to error messages. The factory-default setting is no auxiliary

information appended. The N variable specifies whether or not auxiliary information

is to be appended. Append Auxiliary Information commands are shown in Table 7-5.

Table 7-5 Append Auxiliary Information Commands

Command Append Option

310 No auxiliary information appended (factory default)

311 Auxiliary information appended

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-10

The reader transmits messages with auxiliary information appended as:

where

%separates the auxiliary information and signals the host

computer that auxiliary information is appended.

xx reader ID. Value can be set with command #60NN.

-auxiliary information delimiter

yantenna number. Value fixed at 0.

zz number of reads (00 to FF hexadecimal) of the previous tag

qcurrent status of input0 and input1 (0 to 3). Refer to

“526 Display I/O Status” on page 7-22. These values are inverted

if input inversion is enabled with command 6941.

Reader response:

Done

#320 Disable EAC Page Append (Factory Default)

Command #320 is a factory-set default that disables the EAC (embedded application

code) page append.

Reader response:

Done

#321 Enable EAC Page Append

Note: Note: This functionality was added to the Encompass® 2 Reader to handle a

special unique customer requirement, and is retained in the Encompass 4 Reader for

full backward compatibility.

Command #321 selects the option to append an additional predefined 8 bytes of data

to be read from an eGo® or eGo Plus tag when the reader is in ID only mode (i.e., not

eATA) and multitag sort is enabled. The additional bytes that are read from the tag are

in locations 10 through 17.

The reader transmits the message with EAC page append as follows. The EAC append

data occurs before time and date append data and AUX append data if they are

enabled.

Reader response:

Done

Commands

7-11

ID Filtering — Command Group 4

Group 4 commands set criteria for filtering (buffering or discarding) ID codes. These

commands are useful for eliminating duplicate ID codes and selecting the type of tags

read by the Encompass 4 Reader.

40 Transmit All ID Codes

Command #40 instructs the reader to transmit all IDs without regard for uniqueness.

This command can be useful when tuning the lane and mapping the footprint or per-

forming diagnostics.

After diagnostics are complete, you may want to reinstate the uniqueness check using

command #410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria.

Reader response:

Done

410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature)

Command #410N instructs the reader to buffer and transmit ID codes according to

the following test: an ID is read if previously decoded IDs have changed value at

least N+1 times since the new ID was last received. IDs that do not pass the test are not

read. The factory-default setting is command #4100, which selects a separation of

one ID. Variable N specifies ID separation as shown in Table 7-6.

Table 7-6 Unique ID Code Criteria

Command Uniqueness Criteria

4100 Separation of 1 ID (factory default)

4101 Separation of 2 IDs

4102 Separation of 3 IDs

4103 Separation of 4 IDs

Each time the reader receives a tag ID, it compares the ID with the contents of a com-

parison register. This register contains the following two items:

Item 1 Most recently acquired ID

Item 2 Second-most recently acquired ID

Item 3 Third-most recently acquired ID

Item 4 Fourth-most recently acquired ID

When the uniqueness filter is set to separation of one ID, the newly acquired ID is

transmitted only if it is different from the first item. Separation of two IDs allows

transmission if the new ID is different from Items 1 and 2 in the comparison register.

Separation of three and four IDs transmit the new ID only if it is different from the

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-12

first three and the first four items, respectively.

Note: A new ID can fail the filter test and not be transmitted; however, it remains

stored in the comparison register.

The uniqueness test’s time limit is set by Command #441. If an ID is buffered, it will

not be accepted again unless it arrives at the reader more than the programmed time

interval from the previous arrival or until the receipt of one or more other IDs reset the

uniqueness.

Reader response:

Done

420N Select Valid ID Code Criteria

Command #420N directs the reader to validate an ID received only after it has been

obtained a specified number of times in sequence. Values for N are 0 through 3 (Table

7-7). The factory setting is one acquisition (N = 0).

Table 7-7 Select Valid Code Commands and Frames

Command Valid Code Frames

4200 1 (factory default)

4201 2

4202 3

4203 4

The validation procedure is executed before the unique ID test (Select Unique ID

Code Criteria [#410N] commands). IDs that do not pass the validation test are not

reported.

For example, command #4203 specifies that the same ID must be obtained from the

antenna/RF module 4 times in succession before it is considered for the uniqueness

test. This feature is useful in installations where RF reflections may cause a single tag

to be read multiple times or where an occasional ID might be read from fringe areas

440 Reset Uniqueness

Command 440 causes the ID filtering process set by Select Unique ID Code Criteria

(#410N) to restart. It is used in conjunction with the Variable Timeout #44N) com-

mands. This command provides a method to end all uniqueness timers.

44N Set Uniqueness Timeout

Places a time limit on the uniqueness criterion set by Select Unique ID Code Criteria

(#410N). The parameter N sets the number of minutes on the timeout clock. The fac-

tory setting is two minutes (N = 1).

Command Timeout Clock

Commands

7-13

#441 2 minutes (factory setting)

#442 15 seconds

#443 30 seconds

Entering these commands effectively expires the timeout clock, which erases all cur-

rent IDs in the comparison register. In effect, the first ID that is acquired after the

clock expires always appears to be new and is stored. Newly acquired IDs are only

tested against IDs that are registered after the clock resets.

The timeout clock is continually reset (does not expire) as long as the reader receives

the same tag ID. For example, assume that the timeout clock is set for 2 minutes and

there is a railcar parked on a siding in front of the reader. Without this continual reset

feature, the railcar’s ID would be reported every 2 minutes (each time the timeout

clock expired).

450 Disable Wiegand Mode (Factory Default)

Command #450 is a default set in the factory to disable Wiegand mode.

Reader response:

Done

451 Enable Wiegand Mode

Command #451 enables Wiegand mode, which allows the reader to transmit data in a

format that emulates the output of a magnetic card reader.

In Wiegand mode, the reader transmits Wiegand-formatted tag data through the Wie-

gand interface and ASCII data (the reader accepts reader commands and responds)

through the serial port interface. The reader outputs data from Wiegand-programmed

tags via the Wiegand interface (the red/blue pair for data1/data0; yellow/black pair for

logic ground). Tags that are not Wiegand-formatted are not transmitted through the

Wiegand interface or the serial port when in Wiegand mode, although the tag lock

relay is activated on any tag acquired.

Reader response:

Done

452 Disable Tag Translation Mode (Factory Default)

Command #452 disables tag translation mode. Incoming full-frame tags will be

directly converted to ASCII. They will not be translated from Association of

American Railroads (AAR) and American Trucking Associations (ATA) format to

ASCII.

Reader message:

Done

453 Enable Tag Translation Mode

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-14

Command #453 enables the translation of tags in AAR and ATA formats. Specific

data fields, such as owner ID and car number, will be extracted from these tags,

translated according to AAR or ATA standards, and converted to ASCII. Tags that are

not programmed in AAR or ATA format will be directly converted to ASCII. The

reader will not attempt to translate data from half-frame or dual-frame tags.

Reader message:

Done

454 Disable Multi-tag Sort (Factory Default)

Command #454 is a default set in the factory to disable the multi-tag sort function.

Reader response:

Done

455 Enable Multi-tag Sort

Command #455 enables the multi-tag sort function that allows the reader to identify

unique tags within a group of Intellitag-based tags. Multi-tag sort allows full operation

of the tags and reader to be carried out with a limited number of tags in the presence of

the reader.

Reader response:

Done

Note: Enabling the multi-tag sort function adversely affects the vehicle speed at

which tags may be read. If there is only one Intellitag-based tag in the vehicles of the

target population, multi-tag sort should be disabled.

456 Enable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort

(Factory Default)

Command #456 enables the reader to send the eGo Plus Tag initialize command as

part of the multi-tag sort function. When the reader sends the eGo Plus Tag initialize

command, all tags in the RF field reenter the sort process.

Reader response:

Done

457 Disable eGo Plus Tag Initialization During Multi-tag Sort

Command #457 disables the reader from sending the eGo Plus Tag initialize com-

mand as part of the multi-tag sort function. Any eGo Plus Tags already identified by

the reader during the sort process will not be re-identified as long as they remain pow-

ered in the RF field. The reader will only identify new tags that come into the RF field

or tags that do not remain powered in the RF field.

Reader response:

Done

Commands

7-15

458 Disable Second Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #458 is a default set in the factory to disable the second alternate group

select function.

Reader response:

Done

459 Enable Second Alternate Group Select

Command #459 enables the second alternate group select function that allows the

reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When second alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the

specified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-16

46NN Set Wiegand Retransmit Interval

Command #46NN sets the time delay to control the reader retransmission of Wiegand

data of a tag remaining in the read zone where NN is a hexadecimal code from 01 to

FF.

Note: The actual value of the Wiegand retransmit interval may vary depending on the

operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

For example, 10 = 16 seconds and FF = 255 seconds. The factory default is 4601 (1

second).

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f.

Reader response:

Done

480 Disable ATA

Command #480 disables the reader from reading ATA protocol tags.

481 Enable ATA

Command #481 enables the reader to read ATA protocol data from tags if the reader

is programmed to read this tag protocol.

482 Disable eGo

Command #482 disables the reader from reading protocol eGo data from tags.

483 Enable eGo

Command #483 enables the reader to read factory-programmed eGo data from tags if

the reader is programmed to read this tag protocol.

484 Disable SeGo

Command #484 disables the reader from reading SeGo protocol data from tags.

485 Enable SeGo

Command #485 enables the reader to read SeGo protocol data from tags if the reader

is programmed to read this tag protocol.

486 Disable IAG

Command #486 disables the reader from reading IAG protocol data from tags.

487 Enable IAG

Command #487 enables the reader to read IAG protocol data from tags if the reader

is programmed to read this tag protocol.

488 Disable eATA

Commands

7-17

Command #488 disables the reader from reading factory-programmed eATA data

from tags.

489 Enable eATA

Command #489 enables the reader to read factory-programmed eATA data from eGo

Plus or eGo tags. This option must be enabled to obtain Wiegand data from eGo Plus

or eGo tags.

490 Disable Third Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #490 is a default set in the factory to disable the third alternate group

select function.

Reader response:

Done

491 Enable Third Alternate Group Select

Command #491 enables the third alternate group select function that allows the

reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When third alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the spec-

ified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done

492 Disable Fourth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #492 is a default set in the factory to disable the fourth alternate group

select function.

Reader response:

Done

493 Enable Fourth Alternate Group Select

Command #493 enables the fourth alternate group select function that allows the

reader to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When fourth alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the

specified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done

494 Disable Fifth Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-18

Command #494 is a default set in the factory to disable the fifth alternate group select

function.

Reader response:

Done

495 Enable Fifth Alternate Group Select

Command #495 enables the fifth alternate group select function that allows the reader

to distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Caution

When fifth alternate group select is enabled, tags not programmed to meet the spec-

ified criteria will not be read.

Reader response:

Done

496 Disable Alternate Group Select (Factory Default)

Command #496 disables the alternate group select function that allows the reader to

distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Reader response:

Done

497 Enable Alternate Group Select

Command #497 enables the alternate group select function that allows the reader to

distinguish tags meeting specific criteria pre-programmed into the tags.

Reader response:

Done

Reader Status — Command Group 5

Group 5 commands provide status reports on the parameters and operation of the

reader.

505 Display Software Version

Command #505 displays the reader model number, software version information, and

assigned serial number.

Reader message:

Model E4 Series Ver X.XX SNSSSSSS

where

X.XX Version number

Commands

7-19

SSSSSS Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on

the reader product label

506 Display Hardware Configuration Information

Command #506 displays hardware configuration information stored in the reader

memory by the user. Hardware configuration information is empty by default until

you set the information to any 20 character ASCII string desired using command

#696S...S.

Reader response:

An ASCII string from 1 to 20 characters in length

510 Display RF Transceiver FPGA Version

Command #510 displays RF FPGA VER = XX.XX

511 Display RF Transceiver I Filter Chip Version

Command #511 displays FIL IC I VER = XX.XX

512 Display RF Transceiver Q Filter Chip Version

Command #512 displays FIL IC Q VER = XX.XX

513 Display DSP Board Actel Version

Command #513 displays DSP FPGA VER = XX.XX

520 Display Power Fail Bit

Command #520 displays the value of the reader power fail bit. The power fail bit

changes from 0 to 1 when power to the reader is interrupted. To reset the bit, use com-

mand #63 Reset Reader or command #65 Reset Power Fail Bit. On initial power-up,

the host should transmit one of these two commands to clear the power fail bit.

Reader message:

PWRB P<0 to 1>R0

where

P0 No power failure detected

P1 Power failure detected

R0 Not applicable to Encompass 4 Reader

521 Display Reader ID Number

Command #521 displays the reader ID that is sent in the auxiliary data field.

Reader message:

RDID xx

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-20

where xx = 01 to FF (hexadecimal)

522 Display Communications Port Parameters

Command #522 displays the selected communications port parameters, including the

baud rate (#100N), the number of stop bits (#101N), the parity scheme (#102N), and

the end-of-line delay.

Reader message:

MAIN B<2 to 7> S<0 to 1> P<0 to 2> D0

where

B2 1200 baud

B3 2400 baud

B4 4800 baud

B5 9600 baud (factory default)

B6 19.2 kbps

B7 38.4 kbps

S0 one stop bit (factory default)

S1 two stop bits

P0 no parity (factory default)

P1 even parity

P2 odd parity

D0 00 ms end-of-line delay (fixed)

One space is required between each value. For example, if factory default settings are

assigned, the reader message is

MAIN B5 S0 P0 D0

indicating 9600 baud, one stop bit, no parity, and 0 ms end-of-line delay.

Note: The information transmitted in response to command #522 applies to data and

command mode operation only. While operating in download mode, default communi-

cations parameters are always used.

524 Display Appended Information Status

Command #524 displays the information being appended to the reader transmissions.

Command #31N appends information. Append time and date are not available to the

Commands

7-21

Encompass 4 Reader.

Reader message:

IDAP T<0> D<0> X<0 to 1>

where

T0 Time not appended

T1 Time appended (not valid for the Encompass 4 Reader)

D0 Date not appended

D1 Date appended (not valid for the Encompass 4 Reader)

X0 Auxiliary information not appended (factory default)

X1 Auxiliary information appended

One space is required between each value. For example, if factory-default settings are

assigned, the reader response is

IDAP T0 D0 X0

indicating time, date, and auxiliary information not appended.

525 Display Communications Protocol Status

Command #525 displays the status of command #61N Selected Communications

Protocol, command #614N Selected Mode of Flow Control, and command #612NN

ECP Timeout.

Reader response:

ECPS P<0 to 2> T<01 to FF> X<0 to 2> S0

where

P0 Basic protocol enabled (factory default)

P1 ECP enabled

P2 data inquiry protocol enabled

Txx ECP timeout where xx = 01 to FE (hexadecimal)

Timeout (ms) = 50 * xx

If xx = FF timeout disabled

X0 Flow control disabled

X1 Software flow control enabled (factory default)

X2 Hardware flow control enabled

S0 start of message character is #

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-22

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is:

ECPS P0 TFE X1 S0

which means basic protocol enabled, an ECP timeout of 254 (12,700 ms, 12.7 sec),

software flow control enabled, and start of message character is #.

526 Display I/O Status

Command #526 displays the current input/output (I/O) status. The reader message

indicates whether outputs are being controlled externally by the host through com-

mand #620N Output Control or internally through command #621 Predefined Output

Mode. It also displays the current status of two outputs, two inputs, and the selected

output pulse duration that is set by command #67N.

Reader response:

IOST C<0 to 1> O<0 to 3> I<0 to 3> D<0 to F>

where

C0 Host controls outputs

C1 Predefined output mode

O0 Both outputs off

O1 Output0 on

O2 Output1 on

O3 Both outputs on

I0 Both inputs false

I1 Input0 true

I2 Input1 true

I3 Both inputs true

D0 4 ms output pulse duration

D1 8 ms output pulse duration

D2 12 ms output pulse duration

D3 16 ms output pulse duration

D4 20 ms output pulse duration

Commands

7-23

D5 24 ms output pulse duration

D6 32 ms output pulse duration

D7 40 ms output pulse duration

D8 48 ms output pulse duration

D9 60 ms output pulse duration

DA 76 ms output pulse duration

DB 152 ms output pulse duration

DC 228 ms output pulse duration (factory default)

DD 300 ms output pulse duration

DE 376 ms output pulse duration

DF 752 ms output pulse duration

Note: The first character of the output pulse duration value is alpha; the second char-

acter is numeric.

Table 7-8 shows the output0 and output1 open/closed conditions for the output status

displays.

Table 7-8 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status

Output

Status

Output0 Wire Pair Output1 Wire Pair

Orange/Black Brown/Black White/Black Green/Black

O0 Closed Open Closed Open

O1 Open Closed Closed Open

O2 Closed Open Open Closed

O3 Open Closed Open Closed

Table 7-9 shows the output0 and output1 open/closed conditions for the output status

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-24

displays for readers in IAG applications.

Table 7-9 Open/Closed Conditions for Output Status (IAG Applications)

Output

Status

Output0 Wire Pair Output1 Wire Pair

Orange

Jumper to

Black of

Brown/Black

White

Jumper to

Black of

Green/Black

O0 Closed Open Closed Open

O1 Open Closed Closed Open

O2 Closed Open Open Closed

O3 Open Closed Open Closed

Table 7-10 shows the input0 and input1 open/closed conditions for the input status

displays.

Table 7-10 Open/Closed Conditions for Input Status

Input

Status

Input0 Wire Pair Input1 Wire Pair

Green/Red Blue/Black

I0 Open Open

I1 Closed Open

I2 Open Closed

I3 Closed Closed

527 Display RF Status

Command #527 displays the current status of the RF module. The reader response

indicates whether RF is controlled externally by the host, set by command #640N RF

Control, or internally by input set by command #641. Command #527 also displays

the current RF status and the uniqueness timeout.

Note: If you enter RF frequency settings using command #642NN, the display com-

mand for RF output frequency, F is “Fxx” and indicates use of the backward-compat-

ible frequency entry method.

Reader message:

RFST C<0 to 1> O<0 to 1> T<1 to 3> Fxxx Rxx Gxx Axx Ixx

where

Commands

7-25

C0 RF controlled by host

C1 RF controlled by presence sensor on input0, the red/green pair

(factory default)

O0 RF off

O1 RF on

T1 Uniqueness timeout of two minutes

T2 Uniqueness timeout of 15 seconds

T3 Uniqueness timeout of 30 seconds

Fxxx RF output frequency, xxx = 000 to 118 hexadecimal offset in 250

kHz from 860 MHz. If an invalid frequency value is stored

(corrupted NVRAM), then xxx = “XXX” to indicate an error in

the frequency setting.

Rxx Tag decoder range (distance) for ATA tags, xx = 00 to 1F

hexadecimal range value

Gxx Tag decoder range (distance) for eGo and eGo Plus tags, xx = 00

to 1F hexadecimal range value

Axx RF power attenuation, where 00 is maximum output power and

0A is minimum output power (10dB less than maximum power).

Ixx IAG RF power attenuation, where 00 is maximum output power

and 0F is minimum output power (15 dB less than maximum

power)

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

RFST C1 O0 T1 Fxx R1F G1F A00 I04

which means that RF is enabled by presence sensor on input0, RF signal off, unique-

ness timeout of two minutes, RF output frequency has not been set, maximum RF out-

put range for ATA tags, maximum RF output range for eGo and eGo Plus tags, full RF

power, and IAG power set at 4 dB attenuation.

529 Display Presence Input Status

Command #529 displays the parameters associated with presence detection and RF

control. The reader’s message indicates if presence without tag reports are enabled/

disabled (#690N Select Presence without Tag Report Option), if input inversion is

enabled/disabled (#694N Select Input Inversion Option), and the minimum presence

true period (always true). The reader’s message also reports the selected RF timeout

(#693N Select RF Timeout Period) and the selected means of RF-off control (#692N

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-26

Select RF Control Algorithm). If presence without tag reports is enabled (#6901

Enable Presence without Tag Reports), the reader transmits a report if a presence is

detected without the subsequent acquisition of a valid tag.

Note: RF timeout values vary depending on the operative tag read mode and the type

of tag in the read field. All times are approximate.

Reader message:

PRST P<0 to 1> D0 A<0 to 2> T<0 to F> I<0 to 1>

where

P0 Presence without tag reports disabled (factory default)

P1 Presence without tag reports enabled

D0 Minimum presence true period of 0 ms (fixed)

A0 RF off on timeout only

A1 RF off on timeout or tag

A2 RF off on timeout or presence condition false (factory default)

T0 RF timeout of 0 ms (always expired)

T1 4 ms

T2 8 ms

T3 12 ms

T4 20 ms

T5 24 ms

T6 32 ms

T7 48 ms

T8 60 ms

T9 92 ms

TA 152 ms

TB 300 ms

TC 452 ms

TD 600 ms

Commands

7-27

TE 752 ms

TF RF timeout infinite, never expires (factory default)

I0 input inversion disabled (factory default)

I1 input inversion enabled

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

PRST P0 D0 A2 TF I0

which means that presence without tag reports is disabled, minimum presence true

period is 0, RF off control on timeout or presence false, infinite RF timeout, and input

inversion disabled.

530 Display RF0 Filter Status

Command #530 displays the parameter set for the RF input, including the selected

unique ID code criteria (#410N Select Unique ID Code Criteria) and the valid ID code

criteria (see #420N Select Valid ID Code Criteria).

Reader message:

RF0S U<0 to 4> V<0 to 3>

where

U0 One ID separation (factory default)

U1 Two ID separations

U2 Three ID separations

U3 Four ID separations

U4 Transmit all IDs

V0 Valid ID code criteria of one acquisition

V1 Valid ID code criteria of two acquisitions

V2 Valid ID code criteria of three acquisitions

V3 Valid ID code criteria of four acquisitions

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

RF0S U0 V0

which means separation of one ID for uniqueness filtering and a valid ID code criteria

of one acquisition.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-28

532 Display Wiegand Mode Status

Command #532 displays the Wiegand mode status as either enabled or disabled.

Reader message:

TOF <0 to 1>

where

0Wiegand mode disabled

1Wiegand mode enabled

533 Display Wiegand Retransmit Interval

Command #533 displays the Wiegand retransmit interval. This interval specifies the

delay in seconds before the reader retransmits Wiegand data for a tag still in the read

zone. The factory default is 1 second.

Reader message:

WTI <01 to FF>

where 01 to FF = seconds (1–255) in hexadecimal.

Note: The actual value of the Wiegand retransmit interval may vary depending on the

operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

For example, 10 = 16 seconds and FF = 255 seconds. The retransmit interval in ATA

tag read mode is about twice these values.

534 Display Tag Translation Mode Status

Command #534 displays tag translation mode status, enabled or disabled. If tag

translation mode is enabled, incoming full-frame tags in AAR or ATA format are

translated according to ISO standards. Refer to “452 Disable Tag Translation Mode

(Factory Default)” on page 7-13 and “453 Enable Tag Translation Mode” on page 7-

13 for more information.

Reader message:

TT <0 to 1>

where

0tag translation mode disabled

1tag translation mode enabled

537 Display Echo Status

Command #537 displays echo mode status. In basic protocol (#610 Select Basic

Protocol), the reader may be configured to enable (#6171 Enable Echo Mode) or dis-

able (#6170 Disable Echo Mode) the echo of received commands. Refer to sections

6170 Disable Echo Mode and “6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default)” on page 7-

33 for more information.

Commands

7-29

Reader message:

ECHO <0 to 1>

where

0Echo status disabled

1Echo status enabled (factory default)

540 Display Flash Checksum

Command #540 displays the flash memory checksum.

Reader message:

PCKS I0000 Exxxx

where

0000 Not applicable to the Encompass 4 Reader

xxxx Represents the four-byte ASCII representation of the flash

memory checksum

543 Display Boot Checksum

Command #543 displays the boot ROM checksum.

Reader message:

BCKS xxxx

where xxxx represents the four-byte ASCII representation of the boot ROM check-

sum.

549 Display User-Programmable Group Select Equals (GSE)

Filter Data

Command #549 queries the reader for the user-programmable GSE filter data pro-

grammed in the reader using command #697. The response data is formatted similar to

the data in the configuration command.

For example, if the command string shown in command #697 (see “697 Set User-Pro-

grammable Group Select Equals (GSE) Filter” on page 7-49) was sent to a given

reader, the response to the #549 query command would be:

#A4 0A 0005014202024133

The reader response contains all the data fields repeated in the same sequence as dis-

played in the User-Programmable GSE configuration command.

560 Request Sensor Status Change

Command #560 displays the sensor status change reporting. Status change reporting

may be disabled by command #82N Select Input Status Change Report Option.

Reader message:

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-30

SSTC E<0 to 1>M<0 to 3>

where

E0 Input status change reports disabled (factory default)

E1 Input status change reports enabled

M0 Reporting disabled (factory default)

M1 Changes on input0 reported

M2 Changes on input1 reported

M3 Changes on either input reported

For example, if factory default settings are assigned, the reader message is

SSTC E0 M0

which means that input status change reports are disabled on both input0 and input1.

570 Display Tag Protocols

Command #570 displays the currently selected tag protocol.

Reader response:

ATA:<E, D> eGo:<I, F, D> SeGo:<I, F, D> IAG:<E, D> Sort:<E, D> TMM0

where

I ID (64 bits)

E Enabled

F Full transaction (eATA)

D Disabled

TMM0 Fixed

577 Report Buffered Handshakes

Command #577 reports the buffered handshakes.

Reader message:

where

XX is number of handshakes

#582 Display Synchronization Values

Command #582 displays the synchronization values, which are typically used to alle-

Commands

7-31

viate interference issues in dense populations of Interagency Group (IAG) readers.

The values are set with commands #648NN and #649NN.

Reader Response:

SYNC T<00 to FF> H<00 to 0A>

Where T is the number of milliseconds (ms) before the reader sends a synchronization

pulse to all other readers on the RS–485 bus and H is the number of milliseconds that

the reader holds off starting IAG tag protocol once it receives the synchronization

pulse.

Reader Control Functions — Command Group 6

Group 6 commands set reader control functions such as reader ID, communication

protocol, output pulse, and RF control.

60NN Set Reader ID Number

Command #60NN sets the reader ID that will be sent in the auxiliary data field (com-

mand #311). Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex

digits A though F or a through f

where NN = 00 to FF (hex for 0 to 255, factory default = 00).

Reader response:

Done

610 Select Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default)

Command #610 enables the basic communications protocol. Refer to “Basic Proto-

col” on page 6-4 for more information.

Reader response:

Done

611 Select Error Correcting Protocol

Command #611 enables the error correcting protocol. Refer to “Error Correcting Pro-

tocol” on page 6-4 for more information.

Reader response:

Done

Caution

Do not switch to ECP (command #611 Select Error Correcting Protocol) unless

the host is prepared to acknowledge each reader transmission.

612NN Select Error Correcting Protocol Timeout

Command #612NN selects the timeout interval for ECP. This timeout applies to the

transmission of tag, report, and error messages and to the receipt of host commands.

The transmit timeout is initiated immediately after the end-of-message sequence CR/

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-32

LF is transmitted. If the host does not acknowledge the message within the specified

interval, the reader times out and retransmits the message.

The receive timeout is initiated upon receipt of the start-of-message character (#). If

the end-of-message character (CR) is not received within the specified interval, the

reader discards the partially received message and resets its receiver.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for NN; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f.

The value for NN specifies the timeout interval as follows:

ms 50 * NN for NN = 01 to FE (1–254)

FE Factory default (12,700 ms, 12.7 seconds)

FF Disables the ECP timeout

Reader response:

Done

Caution

Ensure that the ECP timeout is sufficient for a given baud rate. See “Timing and

Synchronization” on page 6-12.

613 Enable Data Inquiry Protocol

Command #613 enable the data inquiry protocol. Refer to “Data Inquiry Protocol” on

page 6-5 for more information.

Reader response:

Done

614N Select Flow Control Option

Command #614N selects the flow control option for reader-to-host communications.

The factory default setting is software flow control (XON/XOFF) enabled. In down-

load mode, flow control is not host-selectable; it is fixed at the default setting. How-

ever, during data mode and command mode operation, the following flow control

options are available. The N variable specifies flow control as shown in Table 7-11.

Table 7-11 Flow Control Commands

Command Flow Control Option

6140 Disable flow control

6141 Enable software flow control (factory default)

6142 Enable hardware flow control

Commands

7-33

Reader response:

Done

If the reader is configured for software flow control (XON/XOFF), it stops transmit-

ting if it receives an XOFF character (host software command 13H). It does not

resume transmitting until it receives an XON character (host software command 11H).

If the reader is configured for hardware flow control (RTS/CTS, request to send/clear

to send), it stops transmission if it detects that the CTS line is no longer asserted. It

resumes transmission when this line is asserted again.

Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using

the ECP.

6170 Disable Echo Mode

Command #6170 disables the reader’s echo of received host commands. If operating

in basic protocol or data inquiry protocol, the reader echoes by default. As the reader

receives a host command, it echoes each character of the command. Once the entire

command has been received and processed, the reader transmits its response. If echo-

ing is disabled with command #6170, the reader does not echo the command, but

only transmits its response. The reader never echoes while in ECP or download mode

operation.

Reader response:

Done

6171 Enable Echo Mode (Factory Default)

Command #6171 enables the reader to echo received host commands. Command

#6170 disables echo mode.

Reader response:

Done

620N Set Output Control

Command #620N provides direct control of two output lines that may be used to

operate external hardware, such as gates or traffic lights. The value for N specifies the

output status requested as shown in Table 7-12. Receipt of any #620N command

automatically disables command #621 Predefined Output Control.

Table 7-12 Output Control Commands

Command Output Control Option

6200 Turn off both output ports

(factory

default)

6201 Turn off output1, Turn on output0

6202 Turn off output0, Turn on output1

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-34

Reader response:

Done

621 Select Predefined Output Control (Factory Default)

Command #621 configures the reader for predefined output mode. In this mode, both

output lines – output0 and output1 – are automatically asserted upon receipt of a valid

unique tag ID. The output line remains asserted for the time specified by output pulse

duration (#67N Set Output Pulse Duration). Any direct control command (#620N

Output Control) automatically disables the predefined output mode.

Note: In Wiegand mode operation, the sense outputs are not controlled by a pre-

defined output mode.

Reader response:

Done

63 Reset Reader

Command #63 resets the power fail bit, clears all buffers, resets tag uniqueness, turns

off both output lines, transmits the sign-on message, and returns to the data mode.

Note: This command does not reset any other configuration parameters.

Reader response:

Model E4 Series Ver X.XX SNSSSSSS

where

X.XXD Version number

SSSSSS Serial number of the unit, skipping the fourth character printed on

the reader product label.

640N RF Control

Command #640N directly controls the RF module. The N value controls the RF

power as shown in Table 7-13.

Table 7-13 RF Control Commands

Command RF Power

6400 Turns off RF

6401 Turns on RF

6203

Turn on both output ports

Table 7-12 Output Control Commands (continued)

Command Output Control Option

Commands

7-35

Command #6400 disables RF-by-input control command #641 Select RF-by-Input

Control.

Reader response:

Done

641 Select RF-by-Input Control (Factory Default)

Command #641 configures the reader for RF-by-input control. The reader automati-

cally turns on RF when it detects a presence through sense0. The reader turns off RF

according to the selected RF control algorithm (#692N Select RF Control Algorithm).

Reader response:

Done

642NN Select RF Operating Frequency

Caution

The authorized bands in the U.S. for CW frequency (i.e., ATA only) is 902.25 to

903.75 MHz and 910.00 to 921.50. The authorized frequency band for modulated

frequency is 911.75 to 921.75 MHz.

Note: RF frequency can be set for backward-compatibility using command #642NN

or for the newer 250-kHz step method using command #647XXX.

Command #642NN sets the reader RF frequency from 902 to 928 MHz in 500-kHz

steps, where NN is a hexadecimal value from 00 to 34. After the reader’s frequency is

set, the value is stored in battery-backed RAM (non-volatile RAM, NVRAM). This

value is NOT altered by power-down, loading default parameters, or a flash download

of new software (there is no default frequency value). It can only be changed by

issuing command #642NN.

Additionally, if the NVRAM becomes corrupted, the correct operating frequency can-

not be guaranteed. In this circumstance, the RF section will shut down and the reader

will send an error message to the host (Error 06). Until the frequency is reset using

command #642NN after NVRAM corruption, the unit will display the same error

message every time it is powered up or if an attempt is made to enable the RF (by host

or by external sensor). The commands to set the RF frequency are listed in Table 7-14.

Table 7-14 RF Frequency Commands

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Approved for

Use in the U.S.

(ATA only)

Approved for

Use in the U.S.

(modulated)

64200 902 No No

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-36

64201 902.5 Yes No

64202 903 Yes No

64203 903.5 Yes No

64204 904 No No

64205 904.5 No No

64206 905 No No

64207 905.5 No No

64208 906 No No

64209 906.5 No No

6420A 907 No No

6420B 907.5 No No

6420C 908 No No

6420D 908.5 No No

6420E 909 No No

6420F 909.5 No No

64210 910 Yes No

64211 910.5 Yes No

64212 911 Yes No

64213 911.5 Yes No

64214 912 Yes Yes

64215 912.5 Yes Yes

64216 913 Yes Yes

64217 913.5 Yes Yes

64218 914 Yes Yes

64219 914.5 Yes Yes

6421A 915 (factory default) Yes Yes

6421B 915.5 Yes Yes

Table 7-14 RF Frequency Commands (continued)

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Approved for

Use in the U.S.

(ATA only)

Approved for

Use in the U.S.

(modulated)

Commands

7-37

Reader message:

Done

6421C 916 Yes Yes

6421D 916.5 Yes Yes

6421E 917 Yes Yes

6421F 917.5 Yes Yes

64220 918 Yes Yes

64221 918.5 Yes Yes

64222 919 Yes Yes

64223 919.5 Yes Yes

64224 920 Yes No

64225 920.5 Yes No

64226 921 Yes No

64227 921.5 Yes No

64228 922 No No

64229 922.5 No No

6422A 923 No No

6422B 923.5 No No

6422C 924 No No

6422D 924.5 No No

6422E 925 No No

6422F 925.5 No No

64230 926 No No

64231 926.5 No No

64232 927 No No

64233 927.5 No No

64234 928 No No

Table 7-14 RF Frequency Commands (continued)

Command RF Frequency (MHz) Approved for

Use in the U.S.

(ATA only)

Approved for

Use in the U.S.

(modulated)

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-38

643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance)

Command #643NN selects the read range for ATA tags where NN is a hexadecimal

value from 00 to 1F; the range increases with increasing NN value. The range can be

adjusted for 32 discrete values where 00 is the shortest range and 1F is the longest

range. The default range value is 1F.

Reader response:

Done

644NN Set RF Attenuation

Command #644NN sets the attenuation control for the output RF power where NN is

a hexidecimal value from 00 to 0A. Settings for attenuation are 1.0 dB increments

over a range of 10 dB of attenuation from the maximum power setting of two watts at

0-dB attenuation to a minimum power level of 200 milliwatts at 10-dB attenuation.

The Set RF Attenuation command NN variables and corresponding attenuation set-

tings are shown in Table 7-15.

Table 7-15 RF Attenuation Command Variables

Variable (NN) Attenuation

Setting (dB)

00 0 (factory default)

01 1

02 2

03 3

04 4

05 5

06 6

07 7

08 8

09 9

0A 10

Reader response:

Done

645NN Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range (Distance)

Command #645NN sets the read range for eGo and eGo Plus Tags where NN is a

hexadecimal value from 00 to 1F; the range increases with increasing NN value. The

Commands

7-39

range can be adjusted for 32 discrete values where 00 is the shortest range and 1F is

the longest range. The default range value is 1F.

Reader response:

Done

646XX Set IAG RF Attenuation

Command #646XX sets the IAG attenuation control for the output RF power where

XX is a hexidecimal value from 00 to 0F. Setting 00 (0 dB) is the maximum power

setting and 0F (15 dB) is the minimum power setting. The default attenuation value is

04.

647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency

Command #647XXX sets the reader RF from 860 to 930 MHz in 250-kHz steps,

where XXX is a hexadecimal value from 000 to 118. After the reader’s frequency is

set, the value is stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM). This value is not altered by

power-down.

If the NVRAM becomes corrupted, the correct operating frequency cannot be guaran-

teed. In this circumstance, the RF section shuts down and the reader sends an

Error06 message to the host. Until the frequency is reset using command #647XXX,

the unit displays the same error message every time it is powered up or if an attempt is

made to enable the RF by host or by external sensor.

The commands to set the RF operating frequency are presented in Table 7-16.

Table 7-16 Select RF Operating Frequency Commands

Command RF Frequency (MHz)

647000 860.00

. .

6470CF 911.75

6470D0 912.00

6470D1 912.25

6470D2 912.50

6470D3 912.75

6470D4 913.00

. .

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-40

Reader response:

Done

#648NN Set Synchronization Output Delay Time

Command #648NN sets the time in milliseconds by which the reader is delayed before

sending a synchronization pulse on the RS–485 synchronization bus to all other read-

ers connected on the bus. Entering a value of #64800 (factory default) disables this

feature. Entering #64801 through #648FF sets the reader countdown time from 1 and

255 milliseconds. If the reader gets a pulse from another reader before its own time

period expires, it first executes all of the enabled tag protocols, then restarts its count-

down timer. The reader on the bus with the smallest entered value becomes the master

and all readers with a larger entered number become slaves. Any reader on the bus can

become the master. The master does not necessarily have to be on one of the ends of

the synchronization bus, but the installer must exercise caution to ensure that every

reader on the bus has a different value.

When the master sends out the synchronization pulse all of the connected readers

begin the RF tag protocol transactions that have been enabled. This synchronization

. .

6470EA 918.50

6470EB 918.75

6470EC 919.00

6470ED 919.25

6470EE 919.50

6470EF 919.75

. .

657113 928.75

647114 929.00

647115 929.25

647116 929.50

647117 929.75

647118 930.00

Table 7-16 Select RF Operating Frequency Commands (continued)

Command RF Frequency (MHz)

Commands

7-41

feature primarily is designed to overcome some of the system-design RF interference

issues in reading IAG tags at locations having a dense population of readers and tags.

All readers on the bus require the same enabled tag protocols for synchronization to

work. Entering increasing values to all readers on the bus is required so that should a

break occur in the bus that is connecting all the readers, the next reader will take over

as master for the rest of the readers that are connected, and the system may work rea-

sonably well until the cabling is fixed. Do not set the synchronization times too short,

as IAG tags are battery powered and their useful life can be diminished if the typical

traffic flow is slow moving, and the tag is activated continuously in the reader pattern.

Command #582 displays the synchronization output time.

The synchronization bus is wired by connecting all of the readers’ “V” (RS–485 syn-

chronization minus) pins together and all of the readers’ “Z” (RS–485 synchronization

plus) pins together (Figure 7-1).

Figure 7-1 Example of Synchronization Bus Wiring

#649NN Set Synchronization Hold Off Time

Command #649NN sets the time in milliseconds that the reader will hold off after get-

ting (or sending if it is the master on the bus) the synchronization pulse before it starts

to run its IAG tag sequence. This command is used in close combination with com-

mand #648NN. Command #649NN is applicable only if a value other than #64800 is

entered for #648NN and is used only when the IAG tag protocol is enabled. Entering a

value of #64900 (factory default) disables this feature. Entering a value between

#64901 and #6490A (hex value of 10 decimal) causes the reader to hold off starting its

tag protocol transaction for the time set between 1 and 10 milliseconds. This feature is

used to lessen the possibility of a reader reading an IAG tag that is activated by

another reader in the site. Because IAG tags are battery powered active transmitters,

their read zones can be much harder to control than for beam-powered passive tags.

The pattern also will vary greatly among tags depending on the condition of the indi-

vidual tag battery. If this feature is used, each reader on the bus needs a value of

between #64901 and #6490A entered for the feature to work. As with the #648NN

command, the reader’s physical location on the bus is not critical, but TransCore rec-

ommends that the reader numbering follow a logical sequence. Using this command,

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-42

more than 1 reader on the bus can have the same value, but TransCore recommends

using all 10 slots before reusing them. Command #582 displays the Synchronization

Hold Off Time.

Table 7-17 lists an example of a plaza having five Encompass 4 Readers in lanes

where multiple readers identifying the same tag would present a system problem. All

of the readers are cabled together on a synchronization bus (see Figure 7-1). The

example timing for #648NN is appropriate assuming IAG is the only protocol enabled

in all readers. The RF for all readers is set to 915.75 (#6470DF) and in this example it

is determined that an IAG attenuation setting of 9 dB (#64609) prevents a reader from

activating a tag in an adjacent lane.

Table 7-17 Example of Encompass 4 Reader Plaza Synchronization Bus Settings

Reader Lane Set Synchronization Output Delay Time

(#648NN) Set Synchronization Hold-Off Time

(#649NN)

* Reader 1 becomes the bus synchronization master.

65 Reset Power Fail Bit

Command #65 resets the power fail bit to 0. The bit changes from 0 to 1 when power

is restored to the reader. Upon reader power-up, the host transmits either command

#65 or #63 Reset Reader to properly initialize this bit. The current state of the power

fail bit may be displayed. Refer to “520 Display Power Fail Bit” on page 7-19 for

more information.

Reader response:

Done

66F Load Default Operating Parameters

Command #66F loads all the factory default operating parameters except RF operat-

ing frequency. Refer to Table 8-2, Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Set-

tings” for a listing of the defaults.

Reader response:

Done All parameters loaded OK

Error A parameter load failed

67N Set Output Pulse Duration

#64814 = 20 ms synchronization time #64901 = 1 ms hold off

#64816 = 22 ms synchronization time #64902 = 2 ms hold off

#64818 = 24 ms synchronization time #64903 = 3 ms hold off

#6481A = 26 ms synchronization time #64904 = 4 ms hold off

#6481C = 28 ms synchronization time #64905 = 5 ms hold off

Commands

7-43

Command #67N sets the output pulse duration for the command #621 Predefined

Output Control. This command specifies the length of time that output line(s) will be

asserted upon receipt of a valid and unique tag ID. The factory default setting is 228

ms. The variable N specifies an output pulse duration of 48 ms to 752 ms.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for N; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f. The command numbers and corresponding output pulse

durations are shown in Table 7-18.

Table 7-18 Output Pulse Duration Commands

Command Duration

670 4

671 8

672 12

673 16

674 20

675 24

676 32

677 40

678 48

679 60

67A 76

67B 152

67C 228 (factory default)

67D 300

67E 376

67F 752

Additional IDs may be acquired during the selected output pulse duration; however,

the timing restarts upon each successive ID acquisition. This command should be used

with discretion. For example, when the tag acquisition interval is short compared to

the selected pulse duration, distinct pulses may not be generated.

Reader response:

Done or Error

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-44

690N Select Presence Without Tag Report Option

Command #690N enables or disables the presence without tag report option. If the

presence without tag reporting option is enabled using command #6901, input

reports are transmitted when a tag presence is detected without the subsequent acqui-

sition of a valid tag. The value for N specifies the reports as shown in Table 7-19.

Table 7-19 Presence Without Tag Report Commands

Command Report Option

6900 Disable presence without tag reports (factory

default)

6901 Enable presence without tag reports

Commands

7-45

Reader response:

Done

Refer to “Basic Protocol and ECP Format” on page 6-5 for message format informa-

tion.

692N Select RF Control Algorithm

Command #692N selects the algorithm for turning off RF power when RF-by-input

control is enabled using command #641 Select RF-by-Input Control.

The values for N specify the RF control algorithms as shown in Table 7-20.

Table 7-20 RF Control Algorithm Commands

Command RF Power Off

6920 On timeout only

6921 Timeout or tag ID acquired

6922 Timeout or presence false (factory default)

Command #6920 turns off RF power based on the timeout established by command

#693N Set RF Timeout Period.

Command #6921 allows RF power to be turned off either after the timeout period or

upon acquisition of a valid tag ID, whichever occurs first.

Command #6922 turns off RF power either after the timeout period or upon the pres-

ence false condition, whichever occurs first.

Reader response:

Done

693N Select RF Timeout Period

Command #693N selects the RF timeout period used by command #692N Select RF

Control Algorithm. Values for N range from 0 through F.

Command #693F disables the RF timeout. The reader turns off the RF immediately

following the acquisition of a valid tag, whether or not it is unique. This control algo-

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-46

rithm may be used in Wiegand mode to ensure that the tag data is transmitted once and

only once per presence on both serial and Wiegand ports.

Uppercase or lowercase characters are allowed for N; for example, hex digits A

through F or a through f. The commands and corresponding timeouts are shown in

Table 7-21.

Table 7-21 Timeout Period Values

Command Timeout (ms)

6930 0 (always expired)

6931 4

6932 8

6933 12

6934 20

6935 24

6936 32

6937 48

6938 60

6939 92

693A 152

693B 300

693C 452

693D 600

693E 752

693F Infinite (never expires, factory

default)

Reader response:

Done or Error

The reader returns an Error message if a valid hexadecimal digit is not substituted

for N in command #693N.

694N Select Input Inversion Option

Command #694N enables or disables input inversion. When inversion is enabled, an

open circuit input is interpreted as a closed circuit, and a closed circuit input is inter-

preted as an open circuit. This feature allows greater flexibility in the attachment of

external equipment to the reader inputs. For example, some proximity sensors indicate

Commands

7-47

presence with an open circuit. In this instance, command #6941 can enable input

inversion so that an open circuit input indicates a presence. The values for N represent

the two inversion options as shown in Table 7-22.

Table 7-22 Input Inversion Options

Command Option

6940 Disable input inversion (factory default)

6941 Enable input inversion

Reader response:

Done

695S...S Set Serial Number

Command #695 assigns the reader serial number according to the format:

695SSSSSS

where SSSSSS is the serial number.

The serial number may contain as many as six uppercase or lowercase ASCII alphanu-

meric characters.

Note: The factory-assigned serial number of the reader contains seven characters.

However, to maintain backward compatibility, the reader software allows only six

characters to be entered. When setting the serial number, skip the fourth (middle)

character of the seven-character number shown on the reader product label.

Note: Once assigned, the serial number is preserved during power-down and the

loading of default parameters.

Reader response:

Done

696S...S Store Hardware Configuration String

Command #696S...S stores hardware configuration information into reader mem-

ory.

The hardware configuration string is assigned according to the following format:

696S...S

where S...S is the hardware configuration string that may contain as many as 20

uppercase or lowercase ASCII alphanumeric characters.

Note: Once assigned, configuration information is preserved during power-down and

the loading of default parameters.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-48

Reader response:

Done

Commands

7-49

697 Set User-Programmable Group Select Equals (GSE)

Filter

Command #697 assigns the user-programmable GSE filter.

The command string is assigned according to the following format:

697 MM AA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

where

MM = The tag uses this mask to determine which of the eight Comparison Data bytes

are to be compared for the Group Select filter.

AA = This field is used by the tag to determine the start address in the tag memory for

the comparison data.

DD…DD = Comparison Data: an 8-byte field (16 characters) used by the tag as the

comparison data for the Group Select filter. The tag compares the data in this field to

data in tag memory beginning at the Start Address to determine if the tag will respond

to a reader Group Select request. Only the bytes having the corresponding bit set in the

GSE Mask is used for this comparison.

As an example, to configure a reader to have only tags with data in byte locations 10,

12, and 15 (decimal) with hexadecimal values “00,” “01,” and “02,” the following

command is used:

#697 A4 0A 0005014202024133

To understand how the data is interpreted, it is necessary to break down the GSE Mask

field, A4, into binary:

A4 = 1010 0100

This mask equates to the tag comparing the first, third, and sixth bytes of the Compar-

ison Data to data in the tag beginning at address location 0A (10 decimal).

The Comparison Data field is broken down in bytes with the bytes corresponding to

the mask underlined in bold (for clarification):

Address: 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11

Data: 00 05 01 42 02 02 41 33

where

0A (10 decimal) must be equal to “00” hexadecimal, the first byte in the Comparison

Data field

0C (12 decimal) must be equal to “01” hexadecimal, the third byte in the Comparison

Data field

0F (15 decimal) must be equal to “02” hexadecimal, the sixth byte in the Comparison

Data field

Reader response:

Done

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

7-50

Auxiliary Reader Control — Command Group 8

Group 8 commands provide control of reader functions, such as the sense input lines.

82N Select Input Status Change Report Option

Command #82N selects the input lines to be monitored to report any change in input

status. The enabled input lines are monitored for any changes in the logic states. If a

change is detected, the reader generates an input status change message and treats it as

a tag ID. If the auxiliary information option is enabled, the input status field displays

the current input values. The value for N specifies the report options as shown in

Table 7-23.

Table 7-23 Input Status Change Report Options

Command Report Option

820 Disable status change reports (factory default)

821 Report change on input0

822 Report change on input1

823 Report changes on input0 and input1

Reader response:

Done

830 Disable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report (Factory

Default)

Command #830 is a default set in the factory to disable the automatic periodic RF

status report.

Reader response:

Done

831 Enable Automatic Periodic RF Status Report

Command #831 enables the automatic periodic RF status report. This function sends

out a periodic RF status report if no other message (a tag read) is sent from the reader

for a period of time. This message is the same message that would be sent in response

to the #527 Display RF Status command. Enabling this function is helpful in some

sites where there may not be much tag activity, and the user wants an automatic way to

ensure the communication channel with the reader is still intact. With this function

enabled, the host system will get a message from the reader at least every three min-

utes.

Reader response:

Done

-1

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-3

Chapter 8

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

This chapter provides instructions for configuring the Encompass®



4 Reader, including factory configuration parameter defaults and

instructions for using terminal emulation software to check and change

the Encompass 4 Reader factory configuration defaults.

Configuring the Reader

After installing the Encompass 4 Reader, you need to configure its operating parame-

ters. Terminal settings should be initially set at 9600 baud, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop

bit, and no flow control.

General Configuration Labeling

Each Encompass 4 Reader and its shipping carton are labeled to indicate the unit’s

general configuration. Table 8-1 contains explanations of the Encompass 4 Reader

label fields.

Table 8-1 Encompass 4 Reader Configuration Label Fields

Field Description

1st TransCore reader designator

2nd Model number

40 = 915 MHz frequency band

3rd Interface

xy

where

x = 0 (integrated antenna); x = 1 (external antenna)

y = 2 (RS–232 and Wiegand); y = 4 (RS–422 and Wiegand)

4th 0nn

where

nn = tag protocol(s). Protocol designators are as follows:

001 = Super eGo® (SeGo) protocol

002 = ATA/SeGo protocols

003 = eGo/SeGo protocols

004 = SeGo/Inter-Agency Group (IAG) protocols

008 = ATA protocol

009 = eGo/ATA protocols

010 = ATA/IAG protocols

019 = IAG protocol

As an example, a label reading 10-4002-004 indicates that this 915-MHz Encompass 4

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-4

Reader is configured with an integrated antenna, RS–232 and Wiegand communica-

tions, and reads SeGo and IAG protocol tags.

Default Operating Parameter Settings

Table 8-2 contains the factory default configuration settings for the Encompass 4

Reader operating parameters.The default configuration settings may not be the correct

operating configuration settings for a specific site. Changes to the configuration set-

tings may have to be made, depending on the site plan, as described in Chapter 2,

”Developing the Site Plan” .

Review the default configurations shown in Table 8-2 to determine which parameters,

in addition to operating frequency and operating range, need to be adjusted. Refer to

Chapter 7, ”Commands” for a complete list of parameters and the corresponding

commands.

Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4 Reader internal timing varies depending on

the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

Table 8-2 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings

Parameter Setting Command

Operating mode Data 00

Baud rate 9600 1005

Stop bits 11010

Parity None 1020

Time and data appended Enabled 302

Auxiliary information appended Disabled 310

Unique ID code criteria Separation of 1 ID 4100

Wiegand mode Disabled 450

Tag translation mode Disabled 452

Multi-tag sort Disabled 454

eGo and eGo Plus tag

initialization during multi-tag sort Enabled 456

Second alternative group select Disabled 458

Wiegand transmit mode 1 second 4601

Third alternative group select Disabled 490

Fourth alternative group select Disabled 492

Fifth alternative group select Disabled 494

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-5

a. Local laws apply. The authorized frequency band for the TransCore Encompass 4

Reader in the United States is 911.75 MHz to 919.75 MHz. Contact TransCore if your

application requires a frequency outside of this range.

Configuring Parameters with Terminal Emulation Software

To configure the Encompass 4 Reader using a PC and terminal emulation software to

manually enter Encompass 4 Reader host commands, follow the instructions in the

Alternate group select Disabled 496

Reader ID number 00 6000

Communications protocol Basic 610

Error correcting protocol (ECP)

timeout 12.7 sec 612FE

Flow control Software (XON/XOFF) 6141

Echo mode Enabled 6171

Sense output control Predefined 621

RF-by-input control Enabled 641

ATA operating range Maximum 6431F

RF attenuation Full power 64400

eGo and eGo Plus Tag operating

range Maximum 6451F

Sense output pulse duration 228 ms 67C

Presence without tag reports Disabled 6900

RF-off control Timeout or no presence 6922

RF timeout Never true 693F

Input inversion Disabled 6940

Serial number NNNNNN 695

Store hardware configuration Hardware configuration not

known 696

Input status change reports Disabled 820

Automatic periodic RF status

report Disabled 830

Table 8-2 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-6

section “Connecting the Encompass 4 Reader to the PC” on page 4-29. Then, enter the

appropriate configuration commands through the terminal emulation software on your

PC.

See Chapter 7, ”Commands” for a detailed description of all available configuration

commands.

Starting the Terminal Emulation Software

You can use a PC and any terminal emulation software to enter the host commands to

download flash software, configure reader operating parameters, perform diagnostics,

and retrieve tag data. The following procedures show examples using Hyper Termi-

nal™, an application included with Microsoft Windows. Most terminal emulation

applications have a similar sequence for launching.

To start the terminal emulation software

1. At the command prompt, type your terminal emulation start command; or if

using Windows Hyper Terminal, select:

Programs>Accessories>Hyperterm

and press ENTER.

The application displays the Connection Description dialog box as shown in

Figure 8-1.

Figure 8-1 Connection Description Dialog Box

2. Enter a name for the session and click OK.

The application displays the Phone Number dialog box as shown in Figure 8-2.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-7

Figure 8-2 Phone Number Dialog Box

3. From the Connect using pull-down list, choose the Com 1 option (or whichever

com port on the PC to which the RS-232 cable is attached) and click OK.

The application displays the COM1 Properties dialog box as shown in 

Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3 COM 1 Properties Dialog Box

4. In the pull-down lists on the COM1 Properties dialog box, choose the following

values:

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-8

•Bits per second: 9600 baud

•Data bits: 8

•Parity: None

•Stop bits: 1

•Flow control: None

Click OK.

The application displays the configparms - Hyper Terminal main screen as

shown in Figure 8-4.

Figure 8-4 Hyper Terminal Main Screen

Verifying Communications

You must verify that the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC or laptop are communicat-

ing.

To verify communications

1. Start the terminal emulation application as described previously in “Starting the

Terminal Emulation Software” on page 8-6.

Note: When testing the Encompass 4 Reader using a laptop, TransCore recommends

that you configure laptop communication parameters to match those of the host com-

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-9

puter to which the Encompass 4 Reader will be connected after testing and configura-

tion are completed.

2. Cycle the power on the Encompass 4 Reader.

Upon startup, the Encompass 4 Reader transmits a sign-on message, displayed on

the terminal emulation screen as shown in Figure 8-5, or a boot ROM failure

message.

Figure 8-5 Sign-on Message

The sign-on message appears as follows:

Model [software version] SNYYYYYY

[Copyright notice]

where YYYYYY is the serial number assigned to the Encompass 4 Reader skipping

the fourth character printed on the reader product label.

Serial number 000000 is the default setting and is not a valid number. If this

number appears in the sign-on message, the serial number has never been stored

into reader memory. Contact TransCore Technical Support.

If the flash memory checksum is not verifiable, the sign-on message appears as

follows:

Model [E4 BOOT] Ver 0.00 A

[Copyright notice]

If the failure message version number equals 0.00 E and no serial number exists,

the flash memory checksum has failed, and the Encompass 4 Reader is operating

out of boot ROM. In this case, the Encompass 4 Reader automatically enters

download mode and waits for a new program to be loaded into the flash memory.

Follow the instructions in “Program Download” on page 5-5.

Communications can also be verified by using the command sequence in 

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-10

Table 8-3.

Table 8-3

Entry Encompass 4 Reader

Response Notes

#01 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Switches the Encompass 4 Reader

to command mode.

#505 <CR> #Model E4 Series Ver X.XX

SN97001P <CR/LF> Reports the software version and

serial number.

#00 <CR> #Done <CR/LF> Returns the Encompass 4 Reader to

data mode.

Command Sequence to Verify Communications

3. If a successful sign-on message is not returned, check connections and

communications factors and correct any errors.

To check connections and communications factors

1. Confirm that the Encompass 4 Reader has power.

2. Verify the connections between the PC and the Encompass 4 Reader.

3. Verify the receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx) connections.

4. If using handshaking, verify the RTS and CTS connections.

5. Verify the COM port settings for the Encompass 4 Reader using the instructions

in “Serial Port Communications” on page 8-18.

Repeat the procedures in “Verifying Communications” on page 8-8.

If you still cannot verify the Encompass 4 Reader and PC communications, use the

information in “Technical Support” on page 9-7 to contact TransCore.

Verifying Tag Read Capability

After verifying communications between the Encompass 4 Reader and the PC, verify

the capability to read tags.

Note: The default tag read mode of the reader is the protocol(s) programmed into the

reader. Table 8-1 shows how to determine which tag protocol(s) your Encompass 4

reader supports. Use only those test tags programmed with the correct protocol(s) for

the reader.

Caution

To avoid damage to the Encompass 4 Reader using an external antenna, you must

connect the antenna before applying power to the reader.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-11

To verify tag read capability

1. Once communications are verified as described in “Verifying Communications”

on page 8-8, enter the following sequence of commands to turn on continuous

RF:

• #01

• #6401

• #40

• #00

2. Pass one test tag in front of the unit. If the Encompass 4 Reader reads the tag, the

terminal emulation application displays the tag information on the screen as

shown in Figure 8-6.

Successful

Tag Read

Figure 8-6 Successful Tag Read

If the tag ID is not displayed, perform the following actions:

•Verify that the Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode (command

#00 Switch to Data Mode).

•Ensure that the tag you are using is compatible with the

Encompass 4 Reader. The Encompass 4 Reader can read tag

types that are compatible with the reader model.

•An Encompass 4 Reader displays the tag read for any tag that is

compatible with the reader programming. Table 8-1 shows how to

determine which tag protocol(s) your Encompass 4 reader

supports.

•Using the audible circuit tester as described in “Testing the

Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-

5, verify that the reader is capable of reading the tag in the read

zone. If it is, the problem is probably in the communications

between the Encompass 4 Reader and the host.

3. Pass a different reader-compatible test tag in front of your Encompass 4 Reader.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-12

4. When the Encompass 4 Reader reads the second tag successfully, the terminal

emulation application displays that tag’s information in the main screen below

the information for the first tag, as shown in Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-7 Second Successful Tag Read

If the read is unsuccessful, perform the following actions:

•Ensure the tag you are using is compatible with the Encompass 4

Reader.

•Using the audible circuit tester as described in “Testing the

Encompass 4 Reader Using an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-

5, verify that the reader is capable of reading the tag in the read

zone. If it is, the problem is probably in the communications

between the Encompass 4 Reader and the host computer.

Configuring Encompass 4 Parameters

Follow the procedures in this section to configure Encompass 4 parameters using a

PC, laptop, or terminal emulator. The PC or laptop must be connected to and commu-

nicating with the Encompass 4 Reader, and the terminal emulation application must be

configured correctly, as described in the section “Verifying Communications” on page

8-8.

Note: If you are using Wiegand mode, you must connect the PC or laptop to the

Encompass 4 Reader using the RS–232 or RS–422 interface before attempting to send

commands to the reader. You can leave the Wiegand interface connected during this

procedure.

To configure parameters

1. Switch to command mode by typing #01 at the prompt on the terminal

emulation screen, and pressing ENTER.

Note: All Encompass 4 Reader commands are preceded by the start-of-message char-

acter (#).

2. To meet requirements of your site, make changes to default operating parameters

as described in the following sections.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-13

The following sections contain procedures to set some of the parameters that are

commonly changed to meet the requirements of a specific site. Procedures are

listed in alphabetical order by parameter.

Appended Tag Data

Use this procedure to set appended tag data parameters using the terminal emulation

application. See “31N Append Auxiliary Information Selection” on page 7-9 for more

information.

To set appended tag data parameters

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #311 to append auxiliary information or command #310 to

have no auxiliary information appended (factory default). Press ENTER.

ID Separation

The host can select a unique ID separation of one ID or two IDs. The reader default

operation is for a unique ID separation of one ID and a uniqueness timeout of

two minutes. You can disable the uniqueness check using command #40 Transmit All

ID Codes. In this case, every tag ID received is transmitted without regard to unique-

ness. You can reinstate uniqueness checking with commands #4100 or #4101 Select

ID Separation.

Note: The dual-protocol Encompass 4 Reader internal timing varies depending on

the operative tag read mode and the type of tag in the read field.

See section “40 Transmit All ID Codes” on page 7-11 and section “410N Select

Unique ID Code Criteria (Anti-passback Feature)” on page 7-11.

To set ID separation parameters

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #4100 to select a separation of one ID; enter command #4101

to select a separation of two IDs. Press ENTER.

Reports

The Encompass 4 Reader can be configured to transmit presence without tag reports

and input status change reports. A presence without tag report is transmitted in data

mode only, and only if the system has a presence detector. This report is sent if a pres-

ence is detected without the detection of a valid tag ID. See sections “529 Display

Presence Input Status” on page 7-25 and “690N Select Presence Without Tag Report

Option” on page 7-44.

If configured with command #82N Select Input Status Change Report Option to

transmit input status change reports, the reader will transmit a message to the host

computer any time the inputs change state. Input status change reports are transmitted

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-14

in data mode only. Input status change reporting is disabled by default. See sections

“560 Request Sensor Status Change” on page 7-29 and “82N Select Input Status

Change Report Option” on page 7-50. Also refer to Chapter 6, ”Communications Pro-

tocols” for information on message formats.

To set presence reporting

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #529 to display presence input status and press ENTER. P0

indicates presence without tag reports disabled (factory default), and P1 indicates

presence without tag reports enabled.

3. Enter command #6901 to enable presence without tag reports, or enter

command #6900 to disable presence without tag reports (factory default). Press

ENTER.

To set input status change reporting

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #560 to display input status change report options and press

ENTER.

• EO = input status change reports disabled (factory default)

• E1 = input status change reports enabled

• M0 = reporting disabled (factory default)

• M1 = changes on input0 reported

• M2 = changes on input1 reported

• M3 = changes on either input reported

3. Enter command #821 to report any change on input0, command #822 to report

any change on input 1, command #823 to report changes on input0 and input1,

or command #820 to disable status change reports (factory default). Press

ENTER.

Reset Reader

Command #63 Reset Reader resets uniqueness, clears the power fail bit, and trans-

mits the sign-on message. The reader returns to data mode following the completion

of this command.

Note: This command does not reset any of the configuration parameters.

See “63 Reset Reader” on page 7-34.

To reset the reader

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #63. Press ENTER.

The terminal emulation screen displays the sign-on message as shown in Figure

8-5 on page 8-9.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-15

Radio Frequency

Caution

The authorized continuous wave (CW) frequency band for the Encompass 4 Reader

in the U.S. is 902.25 to 903.75 MHz and 910.00 to 921.50 MHz and the authorized

modulated frequency band for the Encompass 4 Reader in the U.S. is 911.75 to

919.75 MHz. The RF for each Encompass 4 Reader at the site must be set according

to the frequency specified in the FCC site license. Only trained, authorized installa-

tion and maintenance personnel are permitted by FCC to set the RF.

By using the Encompass 4 Reader an authorized person can set the frequency within

the range from 902 to 928 MHz in 0.25 MHz steps. You can set the frequency by

using a terminal emulation program and issuing the frequency command, as discussed

in section “647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency” on page 7-39.

Note: For backward compatibility to existing controllers, you can set the RF operat-

ing frequency in 500-kHz steps using command #642NN.

To set the frequency range

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #647XXX – where XXX is a hexadecimal value from 000 to 118

– and press ENTER. See command “647XXX Select RF Operating Frequency”

on page 7-39 for a complete listing of the hexadecimal values and the

corresponding frequencies. For backward compatible frequency selection, see

command “642NN Select RF Operating Frequency” on page 7-35.

3. To verify that the RF has been changed to the proper setting, type in command

#527 to see the current frequency setting.

Caution

Contact TransCore if your application requires a frequency outside of the autho-

rized frequency range.

RF Transmission

The RF transmission can be controlled by one of the following methods:

•Connecting a vehicle detector to the sense input0 circuit

•The host sending software commands to the Encompass 4 Reader

As a factory default, the Encompass 4 Reader is configured to control the RF power

with a vehicle detector.

Figure 8-8 illustrates the methods of controlling RF sense output.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-16

Figure 8-8 Encompass 4 Reader RF Control Options

Vehicle Detector Controlling RF Transmission

The vehicle detector can be a loop detector, an infrared sensor, or an ultrasonic detec-

tor that is connected to sense input0 to turn on the Encompass 4 Reader RF transmit-

ter. In Figure 8-8, Option A shows a vehicle detector controlling the RF transmitter.

This operation is preferred because the RF transmits only when a vehicle is in the

Encompass 4 Reader read zone. Command #641 Select RF-by-Input Control (factory

default) must be enabled.

To set the option of the vehicle detector controlling the Encompass 4

Reader

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #641. Press ENTER.

Leave the setting on RF-by-input control for normal operation.

Host Controlling RF Transmission

In Figure 8-8, Option B shows the host controlling the RF transmitter.

If the vehicle detector is connected to the host computer, as shown in Option B, com-

mands #6400 RF Off and #6401 RF On sent from the host computer turn on and off

the Encompass 4 Reader RF transmitter.

Continuous RF Transmission

In Figure 8-8, Option C shows the test configuration controlling the RF transmitter. To

test the Encompass 4 Reader, as described in “Testing the Encompass 4 Reader Using

an Audible Circuit Tester” on page 4-5, you can turn on the Encompass 4 Reader RF

transmitter continuously by issuing command #6401.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-17

You may also use command #6402 to turn on CW RF for diagnostic purposes. Enter-

ing this command transmits a continuous RF signal at the output frequency and atten-

uation level as specified in the respective associated commands until command

#6400 RF Off, #6401 RF On, or #641 Select RF-by-Input Control is received by

the reader. Tags are not read in CW mode. See “640N RF Control” on page 7-34 for

more information.

Sense Inputs

Both the RS–232 and RS–422 configurations used by the Encompass 4 Reader have

two sense inputs — sense input0 and sense input1. The default configuration uses

sense input0 as the presence detection device line. RF power is automatically turned

on only when the presence detection device (loop detector or other device) detects a

presence. Sense input1 is not used directly by the reader; it is used by the host com-

puter to monitor an external device. The Encompass 4 Reader sense inputs are

designed to connect to a dry contact closure.

You can configure the Encompass 4 Reader to generate input status change reports,

which are transmitted like tag IDs. The host can then respond based on the true/false

(closed/open) status of the sense inputs. See the section “Reports” on page 8-13.

The following procedures describe how to set sense inputs using the terminal emula-

tion software. See commands “526 Display I/O Status” on page 7-22, “694N Select

Input Inversion Option” on page 7-46, and “82N Select Input Status Change Report

Option” on page 7-50 for more information.

To set sense inputs

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #526 to display the current input/output status. C0 = host

controls outputs; C1= predefined output mode; O0 = both outputs off; O1 =

output0 on; O2 = output1 on; O3 = both outputs on; I0 = both inputs false; I1 =

input0 true; I2 = input1 true.

3. Enter command #6940 to disable input inversion (factory default) or command

#6941 to enable input inversion, and press ENTER.

Sense Output Devices

Both the RS–232 and RS–422 configurations used by the Encompass 4 Reader have

two sense output circuits – sense output0 and sense output1.

By default, the Encompass 4 Reader operates in predefined output mode where sense

output0 and sense output1 are asserted every time a unique valid tag is read. Both

sense output devices are asserted by issuing command #621 Predefined Output Con-

trol. The devices are not asserted when tags are acquired in the transmit all or buffer

all ID mode or when the Encompass 4 Reader is operating in Wiegand mode. The

sense output pulse duration is variable (command #67N).

The host computer can disable the predefined sense output control by issuing com-

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-18

mand #6201 to turn sense output0 on or by issuing any of the following commands:

#6200 Turn Off Both Output Ports, #6201 Turn Off Output0, On Output1, #6202

Turn Off Output1, On Output0, or #6203 Turn On Both Output Ports. While under

host control, the sense outputs are not automatically asserted when a valid tag is read.

The host must issue command #621 Predefined Output Mode to return to the pre-

defined mode.

Serial Port Communications

The Encompass 4 Reader supports one communications port, which can be ordered as

either RS–232/Wiegand or RS–422/Wiegand. For the RS–232 and RS–422 communi-

cations specifications, the Encompass 4 Reader maintains the following three sets of

parameters that affect serial port communications:

•Port configuration parameters (baud rate, data bits, stop bits, parity)

•Communications protocols (basic, error correcting)

•Flow control scheme (none, software, hardware)

The default serial port configuration for each of these three parameters is as follows:

•9600 baud, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity

•Basic communications protocol

•Software flow control (XON/XOFF)

You can change these parameters in data mode and command mode operation by issu-

ing commands with the host computer. Use the following procedures to set serial port

communications parameters using the terminal emulation program.

Port Configuration Parameters

Use this procedure to set port configuration parameters using the terminal emulation

program. Consult sections “100N Select Baud Rate" through “102N Select Parity” on

page 7-7.

To set baud rate

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #100N and press ENTER.

To set stop bits

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #101N and press ENTER.

To set parity

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #102N and press ENTER.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-19

Communications Protocol

Use the following procedures to set communications protocol. Consult sections “610

Select Basic Communication Protocol (Factory Default)" through “612NN Select

Error Correcting Protocol Timeout” on page 7-31 for more information.

Caution

Do not switch to ECP (command #611) unless the host is prepared to acknowledge

each reader transmission.

To select a communications protocol

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #610 to select basic protocol (factory default) or command

#611 to select ECP and press ENTER.

Software Flow Control

Two modes of flow control are supported — software (XON/XOFF) and hardware

(CTS - clear to send). The host can enable or disable flow control with command

#614N Select Flow Control Option.

The host can use software control characters (XON/XOFF) or the hardware CTS

handshake line to interrupt reader transmissions. When the reader is configured for

software flow control, it stops transmitting if it receives the XOFF character from the

host (host software command 13H). It resumes transmitting only when it receives the

XON character (host software command 11H) from the host. Likewise, when the

reader is configured for hardware flow control, it stops transmitting if it detects that

the CTS line is no longer asserted. It resumes transmitting when this line is asserted. If

flow control is not needed, the reader should be configured for no flow control

(#6140 Disable Flow Control).

Note: TransCore recommends that XON/XOFF flow control be disabled while using

the error correcting protocol.

Use the following procedure to set flow control parameters using the terminal emula-

tion program. See section “614N Select Flow Control Option” on page 7-32.

To select flow control

1. Ensure that the host computer is in command mode.

2. Enter command #6140 to disable flow control, command #6141 to enable

software flow control (factory default), or command #6142 to enable hardware

flow control and press ENTER.

Fine-Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone

If the read zone is too wide or too deep for your application, it can be fine-tuned by

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-20

physically adjusting the Encompass 4 Reader or external antenna mounting orienta-

tion, reprogramming the actual RF power output (#644NN Set RF Attenuation), and/

or reprogramming the RF sensitivity range (#643NN Set ATA Operating Range and

#645NN Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range). The combination of these adjust-

ments allows you to confine the read zone to the area where tagged vehicles pass. This

operation also minimizes reading unwanted vehicles in adjacent lanes or parking

areas.

See sections “643NN Select ATA Operating Range (Distance)” on page 7-38, “645NN

Set eGo and eGo Plus Operating Range (Distance)” on page 7-38, and “644NN Set RF

Attenuation” on page 7-38 for more information.

Note: As described in “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-38, marking the read pat-

tern using test tags that are not mounted to vehicles give a general idea of the read

pattern but the pattern will vary somewhat when actual vehicles with tags are tested.

Final adjustments must be made with tags properly mounted on a variety of vehicles.

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader

You can manually adjust the location of the read zone by loosening the Encompass 4

Reader mounting brackets and pointing the reader in the desired direction. The unit

should be aligned to point directly at the tag as it enters the desired read zone.

Physically Orienting the Encompass 4 Reader Antenna

You can manually adjust the location of the read zone by loosening the antenna

mounting brackets and pointing the antenna in the desired direction. The unit should

be aligned to point directly at the tag as it enters the desired read zone.

Fine-Tuning the Read Zone by Lowering Output Power

You can make the read zone smaller by adjusting the Encompass 4 Reader RF power

output from a maximum of 2 watts to a minimum of 200 milliwatts using command

#644NN Set RF Attenuation. Lowering the RF power has the added benefit of reduc-

ing RF interference with adjacent lanes.

To adjust the read zone by lowering output power

1. Ensure that your PC is communicating with the Encompass 4 Reader using a

terminal emulation program as described in section “Verifying Communications”

on page 8-8.

2. Mark the current read zone as described in section “Marking the Read Zone” on

page 4-38.

Caution

Test tags should be compatible with your Encompass 4 Reader. Test tags can be

ATA-protocol, ISO-compliant, or Inter-Agency Group tags affixed to a plastic or

wooden yardstick, or eGo or eGo Plus sticker-type tags affixed to a piece of nonme-

tallic windshield-type glass 0.190 to 0.230 in (4.82 to 5.84 mm) in thickness. The

sticker-type tags have a reduced read range when not attached to glass.

Configuring the Encompass 4 Reader

8-21

3. Enter command #01 to switch to command mode. You are prompted with

#DONE from the reader and can now enter reader commands.

4. Enter in command #64401 to lower the RF power by 1 dB below 2 watts

(default). Press ENTER.

Note: In the command #644NN, NN can be any hexadecimal value from 00 to

0A. Settings for attenuation are 1.0 dB increments over a range of 10 dB of atten-

uation from the maximum power setting of 2 watts at 0 dB attenuation to a mini-

mum power level of 200 milliwatts at 10 dB attenuation. Increasing the

attenuation lowers the output RF power.

5. Switch to data mode by entering command #00 and pressing ENTER.

6. Verify that the read zone has decreased by moving the tag through the desired

read area. If the read zone is still too large, switch to command mode and enter

the command #64402 to lower the output RF power another 1 dB. Continue

increasing the NN value until the read zone matches the desired read zone.

7. Follow the steps in “Procedures” on page 4-39 to mark the new read zone on the

ground with tape or chalk.

When the desired read zone is established, test the read zone with simulated and

real traffic by performing the following procedures:

To test the read zone

1. Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode.

2. With the Encompass 4 Reader running, place one tag behind your back while you

hold another tag in the new read zone. If a valid read, the data from the tag held in

the read zone displays on the PC screen.

3. Switch tags, placing the other tag behind your back and holding the first tag in

the read zone. If a valid read, the data from this tag held in the read zone displays

on the PC screen. If both tags are read, you have successfully adjusted the read

range.

4. If one or both tags did not read, follow the suggestions in “Verifying Tag Read

Capability” on page 8-10.

5. As a last test, attach test tags to vehicles and simulate traffic going through the

read zone to verify that the system performs accurately in a live environment.

Fine-tuning the Read Zone by Adjusting Sensitivity Range

The Encompass 4 Reader read zone can be fine-tuned by using command #643NN

for ATA tag read mode or #645NN for eGo and eGo Plus tag read mode to reprogram

the RF sensitivity range. Sensitivity range adjustments have less impact on the read

pattern than RF power adjustment, thus RF power adjustment should be used as the

main read pattern adjustment tool. Sensitivity range control may be helpful in stop-

ping some tag reads on the very edges of the read pattern. To produce a noticeable

change in the read pattern, you must decrease the range sensitivity by more than one

increment.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

8-22

To adjust the read zone by adjusting sensitivity range

1. Ensure that your PC is communicating with the Encompass 4 Reader using a

terminal emulation program as described in “Verifying Communications” on

page 8-8.

2. Mark the current read zone as described in “Marking the Read Zone” on page 4-

38.

3. Enter command #01 to switch to command mode. You are prompted with

#DONE from the reader and can now enter reader commands.

4. Enter command #64318 or #64518 to decrease the range sensitivity seven

increments below the maximum (default). Press ENTER.

Note: In the command #643NN or #645NN, NN can be any hexadecimal

value from 00 to 1F. The reader’s receiver becomes less sensitive to tag signals as

the value of NN is lowered from the maximum sensitivity of 1F to the minimum

sensitivity of 00.

5. Verify that the read zone has decreased by moving the tag through the desired

read area. If the read zone is still too large, switch to command mode and enter

the command #64317 or #64517 to decrease the range another increment.

Continue increasing the NN value until the read zone matches the desired read

zone.

6. Follow the steps in section “Procedures” on page 4-39 to mark the new read zone

on the ground with the tape or chalk.

When the desired read zone is established, test the read zone with simulated and

real traffic by performing the following procedures.

To test the read zone

1. Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is in data mode.

2. With the Encompass 4 Reader running, place one tag behind your back while you

hold another tag in the new read zone. If a valid read, the data from the tag held in

the read zone displays on the PC screen.

3. Switch tags, placing the other tag behind your back and holding the first tag in

the read zone. If a valid read, the data from this tag held in the read zone displays

on the PC screen.

4. If both tags are read, you have successfully adjusted the read range. If one or both

tags did not read, follow the suggestions in “Verifying Tag Read Capability” on

page 8-10.

5. As a last test, attach test tags to vehicles and simulate traffic going through the

read zone to verify that the system performs accurately in a live environment.

-1

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9-3

Chapter 9

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

This chapter contains information for troubleshooting an Encompass® 4

Reader and performing minimal maintenance checks. It also includes

information for returning products for repair, obtaining support, and

contact information for providing feedback and suggestions to

TransCore.

Error Messages

The Encompass 4 Reader transmits an error message if a command received from the

host is not a recognized command or if information supplied with the command is not

correct. The reader sends this message to diagnostic commands if the reader fails the

specified test.

Table 9-1 contains a list of error messages.

Table 9-1 Error Messages

Error

Message Description Corrective Action

Error06 NVRAM parameters have been lost. The

Encompass 4 Reader will not function

properly because the RF section is shut off

until the frequency is reset.

Reset the frequency using command

#647XXX.

Error07 The RF phase locked loop (PLL) has lost

lock and is unable to operate at its

intended frequency. RF output is disabled

while the Encompass 4 Reader attempts to

reset the PLL.

Reset the RF frequency. Refer to “Radio

Frequency” on page 8-15 for instructions.

Error08 The RF PLL has successfully regained

lock and has been reset to its proper

operating frequency. The RF section is

returned to its state prior to losing lock

(enabled/disabled). Error08 will only be

issued after Error07 has been issued.

No action necessary; the previous error

has been corrected.

Error11 The operator is attempting to use an

Intellitag-based tag in Wiegand mode while

the Encompass 4 Reader is in ID-only

mode, thus Wiegand compatibility issues.

Enable eATA mode using command #489

if Wiegand operation is needed and the

tags are programmed with Wiegand data.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

9-4

Troubleshooting

You can use the following table for troubleshooting. Should problems continue, con-

tact TransCore for return and replacement procedures. If you contact Technical Sup-

port, use the symptom number in Table 9-2 to reference the problem that you are

having with the Encompass 4 Reader.

ErrorRF1 Warning message that the RF board did

not return an update acknowledge signal If the reader indicates a single ErrorRF1

event and recovers from the error, no

corrective action is required. You may want

to track this error message if it should

occur again. If the reader indicates

repeated ErrorRF1 warning messages

then return the reader to the factory.

ErrorRF2 Warning message that the RF module did

not return an INIT DONE signal If the reader indicates a single ErrorRF2

event and recovers from the error, no

corrective action is required. You may want

to track this error message if it should

occur again. If the reader indicates

repeated ErrorRF2 warning messages

then return the reader to the factory.

ErrorRF3 Warning message of unexpected status

read, including status byte, from RF

module

If the reader indicates a single ErrorRF3

event and recovers from the error, no

corrective action is required. You may want

to track this error message if it should

occur again. If the reader indicates

repeated ErrorRF3 warning messages

then return the reader to the factory.

Table 9-1 Error Messages (continued)

Error

Message Description Corrective Action

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies

Symptom

NumberaSymptom Remedy

1When performing a quick

test of the Encompass 4

Reader, the buzz box does

not buzz.

Check all your wiring connections and antenna connections (if

using external antenna), and ensure that your buzz box is

functioning.

The wires from the Encompass 4 Reader are grouped in pairs.

You could find more than one red wire, more than one black

wire, and so on. You must connect the correct red and white

wire pair to the leads from the battery.

Verify that RF is on as described in “Bench Testing the

Encompass 4 Reader Before Installation” on page 4-13. Using

a terminal emulation program, you may switch to command

mode and issue command #527 to determine RF status. See

page 7-24 for more information.

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9-5

2The baud rate is selected

correctly but nothing

happens.

The Encompass 4 Reader is not communicating with your PC.

Check the power supply to your PC, and check the

connections between the PC and the Encompass 4 Reader.

Try reversing the receive and transmit connections.

3When testing the

Encompass 4 Reader, all the

wires are connected

correctly but the unit does

not respond.

The Encompass 4 Reader may not have the software loaded

inside the unit. Contact Technical Support as described on

page 9-7.

If you are using a terminal emulation program, check that the

terminal emulation setting on the Encompass 4 Reader is

VT100.

Check that the Encompass 4 communication cable is

connected to the correct COM port.

Verify that the external antenna is connected correctly.

4Strange signal responses

come from the Encompass 4

Reader when tested with the

PC.

Ensure that the reader is in the correct interface mode for the

test tag, i.e., Wiegand mode for a Wiegand tag. If using

hyperterminal, Wiegand tag data may display as unintelligible

characters.

Check the system defaults using a terminal emulation

program. Both PC and reader should be set to 9600 baud, 8

bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.

5When a tag is moved in front

of the reader or external

antenna, a clicking sound

comes from the Encompass

4 Reader.

The Encompass 4 Reader works. The sound is the relay

inside the Encompass 4 Reader that is controlled by a lock

signal. The relay is actuated when a tag is in the read zone.

6Nothing happens when the

test tag is passed in front of

the Encompass 4 Reader or

external antenna.

Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is powered on and is in

predefined output mode. (#621)

Verify that the reader is set to RF ON (#6401).

Verify that the external antenna is connected correctly.

Verify that the reader mode matches the test tag.

7The Encompass 4 Reader

came from another site and

does not work the way the

factory defaults indicate that

it should.

Different commands were probably used to support the other

site’s specific configuration. You can restore the factory

defaults by using a terminal emulation program to switch to

command mode and issuing command #66F Load Default

Operating Parameters. All factory defaults except RF

frequency will be restored.

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies (continued)

Symptom

NumberaSymptom Remedy

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

9-6

aUse this number to reference the problem you are having with the Encompass 4 Reader if you contact

Transcore for Technical Support.

8When connected to a PC

that is running terminal

communications software, a

just-powered up Encompass

4 Reader displays one of the

following messages: 

#Model E4 Series X.XX

SNYYYYYY

#[Copyright notice]

The Encompass 4 Reader works. The software is now loaded.

YYYYYY is the TransCore-assigned serial number for this

Encompass 4 Reader. However, if YYYYYY = 000000, a serial

number has never been assigned. If a serial number has not

been assigned to your Encompass 4 Reader, contact

TransCore Technical Support.

9The read zone is too small,

even before the RF power

and range control have been

adjusted.

If another Encompass 4 Reader is in the same area, ensure

that it is operating on another frequency that is at least 2 MHz

different.

Check for possible interference from another nearby RF

source: fluorescent lights, neon signs, high voltage power

lines, nearby cellular telephone, or radio stations. Lights will

need to be removed or shielded. Point the Encompass 4

Reader or external antenna in a different direction to see if

interference comes from only one direction. You may require a

different Encompass 4 Reader that uses another frequency.

Verify that the RF power is set to an appropriate value.

Verify that the range adjustment is set to the maximum.

Verify that the reader is getting at least 16V.

10 The perimeter of the read

zone has been defined, but

there is a “hollow” spot in the

center of the zone that does

not read tags.

The angle of the Encompass 4 Reader or external antenna

may need adjustment. Slightly tilt the Encompass 4 Reader or

external antenna to a different angle to change either the

length or width of the read zone.

Check the range control adjustment. See “Radio Frequency”

on page 8-15.

11 The Encompass 4 Reader is

reading tags out of the

desired read zone, or cross-

lane reads are occurring.

Some interference from other RF or electrical sources may be

occurring. See “Reflection, Refraction, and Diffraction of RF

Signals” on page 2-16.

Verify that the read zone has been properly set up. See “Fine-

Tuning and Verifying the Read Zone” on page 8-19.

12 The Encompass 4 Reader is

not providing any output to

the Wiegand interface.

Ensure that the Encompass 4 Reader is in Wiegand mode

(#451). The default is either RS–232 or RS–422 mode. Refer

to “Wiegand Interface” on page 4-33.

Ensure the tags are properly programmed with Wiegand data.

Table 9-2 Symptoms and Remedies (continued)

Symptom

NumberaSymptom Remedy

Troubleshooting and Maintenance

9-7

Encompass 4 Reader Repair

The Encompass 4 Reader is designed for whole-unit replacement and is manufactured

with surface-mounted components. It requires sophisticated testing and repair equip-

ment. All testing and repairs are performed at TransCore’s factory. Please contact

TransCore to obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) for returning the reader.

Technical Support

Authorized dealers and distributors are responsible for the direct support of all cus-

tomers. Authorized dealers and distributors needing support can contact Technical

Support at (505) 856-8007. Please be prepared to answer a series of questions that are

designed to direct you to the best TransCore support resource available. These ques-

tions will relate to symptoms, configuration, model, and tags used.

Note: End users and facility operators contacting Technical Support will be referred

to the dealer responsible for the system sale.

Marketing Support

Dealers requiring marketing support may call TransCore Marketing at 

(214) 461-6443, 9:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. Central Standard Time, Monday through Fri-

day. Send faxes to (214) 461-6445 ATTN: TransCore Marketing.

Find a Problem with the Encompass 4 Reader or Have

Suggestions?

Call (214) 461-6443 and ask for the TransCore Encompass 4 Reader product manager.

Send faxes to (214) 461-6445 ATTN: Encompass 4 Reader product manager.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

9-8

-1

Glossary

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Glossary

A-3

Appendix A

Glossary

AAR Association of American Railroads

AC alternating current

ACK acknowledge (data valid)

ANSI American National Standards Institute

antenna passive device that converts RF energy into magnetic energy (RF signal)

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASIC application-specific integrated circuit

ATA American Trucking Association

aux auxiliary

AWG AWG (American Wire Gauge) is a U.S. standard set of non-ferrous wire conductor

sizes

backscatter portion of an RF signal that is modulated by a tag and radiated back to the reader

baud measure of number of bits per second of a digital signal; for example, 9600 baud =

9600 bits per second

BCKS boot checksum

BCM buffer control mode

bps bits per second

byte a binary character; for example, one 8-bit ASCII character

cmd command

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

A-4

comm communications

command data set that is recognized by the receiving device as intending to elicit a specific

response

conduit flexible steel pipe use for electrical wiring

cps characters per second

CR carriage return

CRC cyclic redundancy check

CTRL control

CTS clear to send

data information that is processed by a computing device

DC direct current

DIAG diagnostic

ECP error correcting protocol

ECPS error correcting protocol status

eGo proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant TransCore tag products. A

registered trademark of TCP IP, Ltd.

eGo Plus proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 and ISO 18000-6B compliant TransCore

tag products. Super eGo is a superset of the eGo protocol. A registered trademark of

TCP IP, Ltd.

Encompass proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant TransCore reader products. A

trademark of TC IP, Ltd.

eol end of line

eom end of message

EPROM erasable programmable read-only memory

Glossary

A-5

field physical area/space in which a tag can be read by the reader; also, an element of a data

record/frame. For example, division within a tag's data frame.

frames consecutive bits of data in memory that are read and written as a group

frequency bands a range of RF frequencies assigned for transmission by an RF device

hex hexadecimal

hexadecimal base 16 numbering system that uses the characters 0 though 9 and A through F to

resent the digits 0 through 16

host device, generally a computer, that is connected to the Encompass 4 Reader through the

communications port

I/O or IO circuits input/output circuits

ID identification; encoded information unique to a particular tag

INCITS American National Standards Institute International Committee for Information

Technology standards

Intellitag Proprietary name for ANS INCITS 256-2001 compliant Intermec products. A

registered trademark of Intermec Technologies Corporation, a UNOVA Company.

interface connection point for communication with another device

IOST I/O status

ISO International Standardization Organization

LF line feed

mmeter

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

A-6

MHz megahertz

mode method of operation

ms milliseconds

NAK negative acknowledgment (data not valid)

NVRAM non-volatile memory. To save user parameter changes to NVRAM, you must send

command #00 before powering down the reader.

passback used to refer to a tag ID that is not passed on to the tag buffer

PC personal computer

PCKS EPROM flash checksum

protocol specified convention for the format of data messages communicated between devices

PRST presence status

PWRB power fail bit

RAM random access memory

RDID reader ID

read process of acquiring data from a device; for example, from a tag or from computer

memory

reader controlled interrogating device capable of acquiring data from a device; for example,

acquiring and interrupting data from a tag

read zone the physical area in which a tag can be read by the reader

RF radio frequency

RFID radio frequency identification

RFST RF status

Glossary

A-7

ROM read-only memory

RTC real-time clock

RTS request-to-send

SeGo Super eGo (SeGo) is a superset of the eGo protocol

SN serial number

som start of message

SSTC input status change reporting options

tag small self-contained device acting as an identifying transponder

Tau timeout delay

TT tag translation

Vvolts

Ver version (software)

Wiegand the trade name for a technology used in card readers and sensors, particularly for

access control applications. Wiegand devices were originally developed by HID

Corporation.

write process of recording data; for example, writing to computer memory or to a tag’s

memory. Writing writes over (erases) previous data stored at the specified memory

locations.

WTI Wiegand retransmit interval

XON/XOFF protocol for controlling the flow of data between computers and other devices on an

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

A-8

asynchronous serial connection. XON and XOFF are signals to turn a transmitter on or

off. The actual signal for XON is the same bit configuration as the ASCII Ctrl-Q key-

board combination (11 hexadecimal). The XOFF signal is the Ctrl-S character (13

hexadecimal).

-1

Technical Specifications

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Technical Specifications

B-3

Appendix B

Technical Specifications

Reader Specifications

Communications

Frequency Selection 860 to 930 MHz capable

Reading Range Read performance varies depending on tag,

reader, and external antenna (if required) config-

uration and environment. Optimum read range

using the eGo® Plus Sticker Tag is 24.3 ft (7.4

m).

Typical read range should be 12 to 17 ft (3.7 to

5.2 m).a

a. Reading range depends on reader or external antenna configu-

ration, tag type, tag read mode, and operating environment.

Hardware Features

Integrated System

and/or integrated sys-

tem with connector for

external antenna

RF module, tag decoder, external antenna (if

required), power supply, I/O ports, and serial

communications interface all housed in a single

package.

Case Weatherproof enclosure. The system is sealed in

a tamper-proof, polycarbonate housing.

Power Requirements

Input Voltage 16 to 20V AC, 47 to 63 Hz

16 to 28V DC

Physical Attributes

Size 15.5 x 15.5 x 3.25 in (39.4 x 39.4 x 8.25 cm)

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

B-4

Environmental Parameters

Operating Temperature -40°F to +131°F (-40°C to +55°C)

Humidity 100% noncondensing

Vibration Tolerance 0.5 Grms, 10 to 500 Hz

Options

Communications Interface RS–232 and Wiegand or RS–422 and Wiegand

Cable Accessory Kits 58-1620-001: Connector with 5 ft (1.5 m) cable

58-1620-002: Connector with 20 ft (6.1 m) cable

58-1620-006: Connector with 35 ft (10.7 m)

cable

58-1620-007: Connector with 45 ft (13.7 m)

cable

Wall Mount Bracket Allows adjustment in all planes when used to

install the Encompass 4 Reader on a flat surface.

Include the part number 54-1620-001 when

ordering.

Transformer A Class C transformer is available to allow 110V

AC to 18V AC conversion.

Include the part number 76-1620-005 when

ordering.

A Class C transformer (part number 76-1620-

008) to allow 220V AC to 18V AC conversion is

available by special request.

Weight 9.5 lb (4.3 kg)

-1

Wiring Tables

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Wiring Tables

C-3

Appendix C

Wiring Tables

This appendix contains tables that show the wiring connections used to

test and install the Encompass® 4 Reader.

Communications Interfaces

Table C-1 lists the interfaces available with the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table C-1 Communications Interfaces and Conductor Requirements

Interface Number of

Conductors

RS–232 3

RS–232 with RTS and CTS hardware handshake signals 5

RS–422 4

Wiegand 3

Figure C-1 shows the pin assignments for the RS–232 interface signal to the host male

DB9 and DB25 connectors.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-4

Figure C-1 DB9 and DB25 Connector Pin Assignments for Signal to Host

Note: In Figure C-1, supported pin assignments are boldface.

Cable Supplied with the Encompass 4 Reader

The Encompass 4 Reader is delivered with a multiwire cable (ordered as a separate

accessory), which is a 13-pair pigtail. An alternate 15-pair pigtail may be substituted.

The 13-pair pigtail is a colored-wire pair cable, with different colors denoting the indi-

vidual pairs, one pair of which is red/black. The alternate 15-pair pigtail is a red/black-

wire pair cable, with numbers on the pairs to denote the individual pairs. Two pairs of

the 15-pair pigtail, numbers 14 and 15, are not used.

The following tables show the colored-wire pair (13-pair) and alternate wire pair

(15-pair) assignments for the various interfaces, power, and input/output connections.

Wiring Tables

C-5

RS–232 Interface

Table C-2 shows the RS–232 assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-2 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass

4 Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Wire Pair

from

Encompass 4

Reader

Color Used

TxD —

Encompass

4 Reader output Red/Black

Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD —

Encompass

4 Reader input

Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Pin 5 Pin 7

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS —

Encompass

4 Reader output Yellow/Red

Yellow Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS —

Encompass

4 Reader input

Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Table C-3 shows the RS–232 assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4 Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connect

Wire to

Host DB9

Connect

Wire to

Host DB25

Pairing Color

TxD — Encompass

4 Reader output Pair 1

Black Pin 2 Pin 3

RxD — Encompass

4 Reader input Red Pin 3 Pin 2

Signal ground Pair 5 Black or

Red Pin 5 Pin 7

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-6

RS–422 Interface

Table C-4

Table C-4 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass

4 Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass 4

Reader

Color Used

RS–422 Transmit positive Yellow/Red Yellow Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Red/Black Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or

Black Signal Ground

shows the RS–422 assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-5

Table C-5 RS–422 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Encompass

4 Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connect to

Signal from

Host

Pairing Color

RS–422 Transmit positive Pair 11 Black Receive (+)

RS–422 Transmit negative Red Receive (–)

RS–422 Receive positive Pair 1 Black Transmit (+)

RS–422 Receive negative Red Transmit (–)

shows the RS–422 assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Optional for hardware handshaking

RTS — Encompass

4 Reader output Pair 11

Black Pin 8 Pin 5

CTS — Encompass

4 Reader input Red Pin 7 Pin 4

Table C-3 RS–232 Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Wiring Tables

C-7

Wiegand Interface

Table C-6

Table C-6 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from Encompass 4

Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wire Pair

from

Encompass

4 Reader

Color Used

Wiegand Zero Output Blue/Red Blue Data0

Wiegand One Output Red Data1

Signal Ground Yellow/Black Yellow or Black Ground

shows the Wiegand assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair) cable.

Table C-7 shows the Wiegand assignments for alternate wire (15-pair) cable.

Table C-7 Wiegand Interface Signal Wiring for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Encompass

4 Reader

Alternate Wire Cable

Pairing Color

Connect to

Signal from

Host

Wiegand Zero output Pair 10 Black Data0

Wiegand One output Red Data1

Signal Ground Pair 5 Black or Red Ground

Power Supply Connections

AC Power

Table C-8 shows the colored-wire pair (13-pair) assignments for connection to a low-

voltage AC power supply.

Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal From Encompass

4 Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable Connect to

Transformer

Terminal Strip

Wire Pair from

Encompass

4 Reader Color Used

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-8

Main power input

Brown/Red and

Orange/Red

Brown/

Orange L1

16-20V AC

Main power return Red/Red L2

16-20V AC

Table C-8 AC Transformer Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable (continued)

Wiring Tables

C-9

Table C-9 shows the alternate wire (15-pair) assignments for connection to a low-volt-

age AC power supply.

Table C-9 AC Transformer Connections for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from Encompass

4 Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connect to

Transformer

Terminal

Strip

Pairing Color

Main power input

Pair 12 and

Pair 13

Black/Black L1

16-20V AC

Main power return Red/Red L2

16-20V AC

Low-Voltage DC Power

Table C-10 shows the colored-wire pair (13-pair) assignments for connection to a low-

voltage DC power supply.

Table C-10 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Signal from

Encompass

4 Reader

Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Connection Use

Wire Pair

from

Encompass 4

Reader

Color Used

Main power input Brown/Red

and

Orange/Red

Brown and

Orange 16 to 28V DC + terminal

Main power return Red and

Red 16 to 28V DC – terminal

Table C-11 shows the alternate wire (15-pair) assignments for connection to a low-

voltage DC power supply.

Table C-11 Low Voltage DC Cable Connections for Alternate Wire Cable

Signal from

Encompass 4

Reader

Alternate Wire Cable Connection Use

Pairing Color

Main power input Pair 12 and

Pair 13

Black and

Black 16 to 28V DC + terminal

Main power return Red and Red 16 to 28V DC – terminal

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-10

Input/Output Cabling Assignments

Table C-12 shows the sense input/output assignments for colored-wire pair (13-pair)

cable.

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Blue/

Red EBlue WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control

applications

FRed WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control

applications

White/

Red LWhite Lock Tag lock output,

active-closed Testing

maintenance

MRed Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Green/

Red NGreen Sense Input0 Sense Input0

(loop), active-

closed

Loop and

presence detection

PRed Sense

Input0_RTN Sense Input0

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

Loop and

presence detection

Blue/

Black RBlue Sense Input1 Sense Input1,

active-closed General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence

SBlack Sense

Input1_RTN Sense Input1

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence

Brown/

Black TBlack Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched output to

control gate

UBrown Sense

Output0_NO Sense Output0,

normally open

terminal

Switched output to

control gate

Orange/

Black VBlack Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect

output), common

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Wiring Tables

C-11

Orange/

Black V** Black Sync_485_N RS–485 bus

negative Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization

bus

WOrange Sense Output

0_NC Sense Output0,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Green/

Black XBlack Sense

Output1_ COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

YGreen Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

White/

Black ZBlack Sense

Output1_COM Sense Output1,

common Switched sense

output

White/

Black Z** Black Sync_485_P RS–485 bus

positive Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization

bus

aWhite Sense

Output1_NC Sense Output1,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Yellow/

Black bYellow GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–

232 and Wiegand

communications)

cBlack GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–

232 and Wiegand

communications)

**Use this synchronization pin designation if installing an Encompass 4 Reader that reads IAG

protocol tags. The part numbers for these readers are as follows:

10-4002-004; 10-4002-010; 10-4002-019; 10-4004-004; 10-4004-010; 10-4004-019;

10-4012-004; 10-4012-010; 10-4012-019; 10-4014-004; 10-4014-010; 10-4014-019

Table C-12 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable

Pair Pin Color Signal Description Typical Function

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-12

Table C-13 shows the sense input/output assignments for alternate wire (15-pair)

cable.

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pairing Pin Color

Pair 10 EBlack WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control applications

FRed WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control applications

Pair 8 LBlack Lock Tag lock sense

output, active-

closed

Testing maintenance

MRed Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing maintenance

Pair 9 NBlack Sense Input0 Sense Input0

(loop), active-

closed

Loop and presence

detection

PRed Sense

Input0_RTN Sense Input0

return; not isolated

from signal ground

Loop and presence

detection

Pair 4 RBlack Sense Input1 Sense Input1,

active-closed General-purpose

sense input, not used

to detect presence

SRed Sense

Input1_RTN Sense Input1

return; not isolated

from signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not used

to detect presence

Pair 6 TBlack Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched sense

output to control gate

URed Sense

Output0_NO Sense Output0,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output to control gate

Pair 7 V Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense Output0

(tag detect output),

common terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control (light,

gate, buzzer, etc.)

or V** Black Sync_485_N RS–485 bus

negative Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization bus

Wiring Tables

C-13

WRed Sense

Output0_NC Sense Output0,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control (light,

gate, buzzer, etc.)

Pair 3 XBlack Sense

Output1_COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

YRed Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

Pair 2 ZBlack Sense

Output1_COM Sense Output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

or Z** Black Sync_485_P RS–485 bus

positive Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization bus

aRed Sense

Output1_NO Sense Output1,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Pair 5 bBlack GND logic ground Signal ground (used

with RS–232 and

Wiegand

communications)

cRed GND logic ground Signal ground (used

with RS–232 and

Wiegand

communications)

**Use this synchronization pin designation if installing an Encompass 4 Reader that reads IAG

protocol tags. The part numbers for these readers are as follows:

10-4002-004; 10-4002-010; 10-4002-019; 10-4004-004; 10-4004-010; 10-4004-019;

10-4012-004; 10-4012-010; 10-4012-019; 10-4014-004; 10-4014-010; 10-4014-019

Table C-13 Sense Input/Output Cabling Assignments for Alternate Wire Cable

Alternate Wire Signal Description Typical Function

Pairing Pin Color

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-14

Summary Table

Table C-14 shows all assignments for both colored-wire pair (13-pair) and alternate

wire (15-pair) cables.

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable

Colored-Wire Pair

Cable Alternate Wire

Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pair Pin Color Pair Color

Red/

Black

ABlack

Pair 1

Black TX232,

RX422+,

IF485-

RS–232 transmit,

RS–422 receive

positive, RS-485

negative

Encompass 4

Reader output, host

input

BRed Red RX232,

RX422-,

IF485+

RS–232 receive,

RS–422 receive

negative, RS-485

positive

Encompass 4

Reader input, host

output

Yellow/

Red

CYellow

Pair 11

Black RTS232,

TX422 RS–232 request

to send or RS–

422 transmit

positive

Encompass 4

Reader output, host

input for hardware

handshaking

DRed Red CTS232,

TX422 RS–232 clear to

send or RS–422

transmit negative

Encompass 4

Reader input, host

output for hardware

handshaking

Blue/

Red

EBlue

Pair 10

Black WGND0 Wiegand data0 Parking/access

control applications

FRed Red WGND1 Wiegand data1 Parking/access

control applications

Orange

/Red

GOrange Pair 13 Black 18V Main power input

HRed Red 18V_RTN Main power return

Brown/

Red

JBrown Pair 12 Black 18V Main power input

KRed Red 18V_RTN Main power return

White/

Red

LWhite

Pair 8

Black Lock Tag lock sense

output, active-

closed

Testing

maintenance

MRed Red Lock_RTN Tag lock return Testing

maintenance

Wiring Tables

C-15

Green/

Red

NGreen

Pair 9

Black Sense Input0 Sense input0

(loop), active-

closed

Loop and presence

detect

PRed Red Sense

Input0_RTN Sense input0

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

Loop and presence

detect

Blue/

Black

RBlue

Pair 4

Black Sense Input1 Sense input1,

active-closed General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence.

SBlack Red Sense

Input1_RTN Sense input1

return; not

isolated from

signal ground

General-purpose

sense input, not

used to detect

presence.

Brown/

Black

TBlack

Pair 6

Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense output0

(tag detect),

common terminal

Switched sense

output to control

gate

UBrown Red Sense

Output0_NO Sense output0,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output to control

gate

Orange

/Black

VBlack

Pair 7

Black Sense

Output0_COM Sense output0

(tag detect

output), common

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

V** Black Black Sync_485_N RS–485 bus

negative Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization bus

WOrange Red Sense

Output0_NC Sense output0,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output for any

external control

(light, gate, buzzer,

etc.)

Green/

Black

XBlack

Pair 3

Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output.

YGreen Red Sense

Output1_NO Sense output1,

normally open

terminal

Switched sense

output

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Colored-Wire Pair

Cable Alternate Wire

Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pair Pin Color Pair Color

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

C-16

White/

Black

ZBlack

Pair 2

Black Sense

Output1_COM Sense output1,

common terminal Switched sense

output

Z** Black Black Sync_485_P RS–485 bus

positive Used to connect

Encompass 4

Readers with IAG

capability on a

synchronization bus

aWhite Red Sense

Output1_NC Sense output1,

normally closed

terminal

Switched sense

output

Yellow/

Black

bYellow

Pair 5

Black GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–232

and Wiegand

communications)

cBlack Red GND logic ground Signal ground

(used with RS–232

and Wiegand

communications)

**Use this synchronization pin designation if installing an Encompass 4 Reader that reads IAG protocol tags. The part

numbers for these readers are as follows:

10-4002-004; 10-4002-010; 10-4002-019; 10-4004-004; 10-4004-010; 10-4004-019;

10-4012-004; 10-4012-010; 10-4012-019; 10-4014-004; 10-4014-010; 10-4014-019

Table C-14 All Cabling Assignments for Colored-Wire Pair Cable or Alternate Wire Cable (continued)

Colored-Wire Pair

Cable Alternate Wire

Cable Signal Description Typical Function

Pair Pin Color Pair Color

-1

Command Quick Reference

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Command Quick Reference

D-3

Appendix D

Command Quick Reference

This appendix lists the default configuration settings for the

Encompass® 4 Reader and its commands. Commands are listed both

numerically and alphabetically.

Command Syntax

The command numbers consist of from 2 to 4 hex digits. The letters N or S may follow

a command number. The letter N indicates that part of the command number is vari-

able. The letter S indicates the requirement for an alphanumeric data string that is to

be included immediately following the command number. Hex digits (0–9, A–F) in

either uppercase or lowercase characters may be used in data strings and for hex digits

A–F. For more information see Chapter 5, “General Software Information.

Table D-1 lists factory default settings. Table D-2 on page D-5 lists, in numerical

order, all of the commands available to users. Table D-3 on page D-17 lists the same

commands by command name.

Factory Default Settings

Note: Table D-1 lists the factory default settings for the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings

Parameter Setting Command

Operating mode Data 00

Baud rate 9600 1005

Stop bits 11010

Parity None 1020

Time and data appended Enabled 302

Auxiliary information appended Disabled 310

Disable EAC page append Disabled 320

Unique ID code criteria Separation of 1 ID 4100

Valid ID code criteria Acquisition of 1 ID 4200

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-4

Uniqueness timeout 2 minutes 441

Wiegand mode Disabled 450

Tag translation mode Disabled 452

Multi-tag sort Disabled 454

eGo or eGo Plus Tag initialization

during multi-tag sort Enabled 456

Second alternate group select Disabled 458

Wiegand transmit mode 1 second 4601

Third alternate group select Disabled 490

Fourth alternate group select Disabled 492

Fifth alternate group select Disabled 494

Alternate group select Disabled 496

Reader ID number 00 6000

Communications protocol Basic 610

Error correcting protocol (ECP)

timeout 12.7 sec 612FE

Flow control Software (XON/XOFF) 6141

Echo mode Enabled 6171

Set output control Turn off both outputs 6200

Sense output control Predefined 621

RF-by-input control Enabled 641

ATA operating range Maximum 6431F

RF attenuation Full power 64400

eGo or eGo Plus operating range Maximum 6451F

Sense output pulse duration 228 ms 67C

Synchronization output delay time Disabled 64800

Synchronization hold off time Disabled 64900

Presence without tag reports Disabled 6900

RF-off control Timeout or no presence 6922

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Command Quick Reference

D-5

Numerical Command List

The following conventions are used in Table D-2:

•Items in bold italics identify factory default settings.

•Only the command-related data portion of the reader message is shown.

Refer to Chapter 6, “Communications Protocols for the complete syntax of commands

and messages.

RF timeout Never true 693F

Input inversion Disabled 6940

Input status change reports Disabled 820

Automatic periodic RF status

report Disabled 830

Table D-1 Encompass 4 Reader Default Configuration Settings (continued)

Parameter Setting Command

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically

Number Command Name Reader Message

00 Switch to data mode Done

01 Switch to command mode Done

1002 Set baud rate = 1200 baud Done

1003 Set baud rate = 2400 baud Done

1004 Set baud rate = 4800 baud Done

1005 Set baud rate = 9600 baud Done

1006 Set baud rate = 19.2 K baud Done

1007 Set baud rate = 38.4 K baud Done

1010 Use one stop bit Done

1011 Use two stop bits Done

1020 Disable parity Done

1021 Select even parity Done

1022 Select odd parity Done

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-6

20 Set time Done

21 Set date Done

22 Display time and date Time and date

300 No time and date appended Done

302 Time and date appended Done

310 Disable aux info append Done

311 Enable aux info append Done

320 Disable EAC page append Done

321 Enable EAC page append Done

40 Transmit all IDs Done

4100 Select one ID separation Done

4101 Select two ID separation Done

4102 Select three ID separation Done

4103 Select four ID separation Done

4200 Select 1 valid ID code Done

4201 Select 2 valid ID codes Done

4202 Select 3 valid ID codes Done

4203 Select 4 valid ID codes Done

440 Reset uniqueness Done

441 Set uniqueness timeout to 2

minutes Done

442 Set uniqueness timeout to 15

seconds Done

443 Set uniqueness timeout to 30

seconds Done

450 Disable Wiegand mode Done

451 Enable Wiegand mode Done

452 Disable translation mode Done

454 Disable multi-tag sort Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-7

455 Enable multi-tag sort Done

456 Enable eGo or eGo Plus Tag

initialization during multi-tag

sort

Done

457 Disable eGo or eGo Plus Tag

initialization during multi-tag sort Done

458 Disable second alternate group

select Done

459 Enable second alternate group

select Done

46NN Set Wiegand retransmit interval

NN = 01 to FF seconds Done

4601 Set Wiegand retransmit interval

to 1 second Done

480 Disable ATA Done

481 Enable ATA Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag

protocol. Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

482 Disable eGo Done

483 Enable eGo Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag

protocol. Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

484 Disable SeGo Done

485 Enable SeGo Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag

protocol. Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

486 Disable IAG Done

487 Enable IAG Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag

protocol. Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

488 Disable eATA Done

489 Enable eATA Done

490 Disable third alternate group

select Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-8

491 Enable third alternate group

select Done

492 Disable fourth alternate group

select Done

493 Enable fourth alternate group

select Done

494 Disable fifth alternate group

select Done

495 Enable fifth alternate group select Done

496 Disable alternate group select Done

497 Enable alternate group select Done

505 Display version Model [model] 

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]

506 Display hardware configuration

information S...S 

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 20

characters)

510 Display RF transceiver FPGA

version RF FPGA VER = XX.XX

511 Display RF transceiver I filter chip

version FIL IC I VER = XX.XX

512 Display RF transceiver Q filter

chip version FIL IC Q VER = XX.XX

513 Display DSP board Actel version DSP FPGA VER = XX.XX

520 Display power fail bit PWRB Px R0 

P0 = no power fail has occurred

P1 = power fail has occurred

R0 = not applicable

521 Display reader ID number RDID xx 

xx = 00–FF

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-9

522 Display comm port parameters MAIN Bx Sx Px D0 

B2 = 1200

B3 = 2400

B4 = 4800

B5 = 9600

B6 = 19.2

B7 = 38.4

S0 = one stop bit

S1 = two stop bits

P0 = no parity

P1 = even

P2 = odd

D0 = EOL delay of 0 ms

524 Display appended info status IDAP T1 D1 X0 

T0 = time not appended

T1 = time appended

D0 = date not appended

D1 = date appended

X0 = aux info not appended



X1 = aux info appended

525 Display comm protocol ECPS Px Txx Xx S0 

P0 = basic

P1 = ECP

P2 = echo Inquiry

Txx = ECP timeout

ms = 50 * xx

FF = disabled ECP timeout

X0 = no flow control

X1 = software flow control

X2 = hardware flow control

S0 = som character is #

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-10

526 Display I/O status IOST Cx Ox Ix Dx

C0 = host controls outputs

C1 = predefined output mode

O0 = both outputs off

O1 = output0 on

O2 = output1 on

O3 = both outputs on

I0 = both inputs false

I1 = input0 true

I2 = input1 true

I3 = both inputs true

D0 to DF = output pulse duration



where

D0 = 4 ms

D1 = 8 ms

D2 = 12 ms

D3 = 16 ms

D4 = 20 ms

D5 = 24 ms

D6 = 32 ms

D7 = 40 ms

D8 = 48 ms

D9 = 60 ms

DA = 76 ms

DB = 152 ms

DC = 228 ms

DD = 300 ms

DE = 376 ms

DF = 752 ms

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-11

527 Display RF status RFST Cx Ox Tx Fxxx Rxx Gxx

Axx Ixx

C0 = RF controlled by host

C1 = RF-by-presence sensor

O0 = RF off

O1 = RF on

T1 = uniqueness timeout of 2

min

T2 = uniqueness timeout of 15

sec

T3 = uniqueness timeout of 30

sec

Fxxx = RF output frequency,

xxx = 000 to 118

Rxx = Tag decoder range

(distance) for ATA tags, 00 to 1F

hexadecimal range value

Gxx = Tag decoder range

(distance) for eGo Plus Tags, 00

to 1F hexadecimal range value

Axx = RF power attenuation, 00

max to 0A min (10 dB less than

max)

Ixx = IAG RF power attenuation,

00 max to 0F min (15 dB less

than max)

Note If you enter RF settings

using command

#642NN, the display

command for RF output

frequency, F is "Fxx" and

indicates use of the

backward-compatible

frequency entry method.

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-12

529 Display presence input status PRST Px D0 Ax Tx Ix

P0 = disable presence w/o tag

reports

P1 = enable presence w/o tag

reports

D0 = min presence true period 

of 0 ms

A0 = RF off on timeout

A1 = RF off on timeout or tag

A2 = RF off on timeout or no

presence

T0: RF timeout of 0 ms (always

expired)

T1: RF timeout of 4 ms

T2: RF timeout of 8 ms

T3: RF timeout of 12 ms

T4: RF timeout of 20 ms

T5: RF timeout of 24 ms

T6: RF timeout of 32 ms

T7: RF timeout of 48 ms

T8: RF timeout of 60 ms

T9: RF timeout of 92 ms

TA: RF timeout of 152 ms

TB: RF timeout of 300 ms

TC: RF timeout of 452 ms

TD: RF timeout of 600 ms

TE: RF timeout of 752 ms

TF: RF timeout infinite, never

expires (factory default)

I0 = Input inversion disabled

(factory default)

I1 = Input inversion enabled

530 Display RF0 filter status RF0S Ux Vx 

U0 = one ID separation

U1 = two ID separations

U2 = three ID separations

U3 = four ID separations

U4 = transmit all IDs

V0 = valid ID code criteria of

one acquisition (fixed)

V1 = valid ID code criteria of two

acquisitions

V2 = valid ID code criteria of

three acquisitions

V3 = valid ID code criteria of

four acquisitions

532 Display Wiegand mode status T0F x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

533 Display Wiegand retransmit

interval WTI xx 

xx = 01–FF seconds

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-13

534 Display tag translation mode

status TT <0 to 1>



0 = tag translation mode

disabled

1 = tag translation mode

enabled

537 Display echo status ECHO x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

540 Display flash checksum PCKS I0000 Exxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

543 Display boot checksum BCKS xxxx 

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

549 Display user-programmable

group select equals (GSE) filter

data

The response data is formatted

similar to the data in the config-

uration command.

560 Display input status change SSTC Ex Mx 

E0 = status change reports

disabled



E1 = status change reports

enabled

M0 = no reporting



M1 = report change on input0

M2 = report change on input1

M3 = report change on either

input

570 Display tag protocols ATA:<E, D> eGo:<I, F, D>

SeGo:<I, F, D> IAG:<E, D>

Sort:<E, D>

I = ID (64 bits)

E = Enabled

F = Full transaction (eATA)

D = Disabled

577 Report buffered handshakes XX = number of handshakes

582 Display synchronization values

SYNC T<00 to FF> H<00 to 0A>

60NN Set reader ID number 

NN = 00 to FF Done

6000 Set reader ID number to 00 Done

610 Select basic protocol Done

611 Select ECP protocol Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-14

612NN Set ECP timeout

NN = 01–FE (1–255)

timeout = 50 ms * NN

(if NN = FF, timeout is disabled)

Done

612FE Set ECP timeout = 12.7 sec Done

613 Enable data inquiry protocol Done

6140 Disable flow control Done

6141 Enable software flow control Done

6142 Enable hardware flow control Done

6170 Disable echo Done

6171 Enable echo Done

6200 Turn both outputs off Done

6201 Turn output0 on Done

6202 Turn output1 on Done

6203 Turn both outputs on Done

621 Select predefined output mode Done

63 Reset reader Model [model] 

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]

TransCore

6400 Turn off RF Done

6401 Turn on RF Done

641 Select RF-by-input control Done

642NN Select RF operating frequency Done

643NN Set ATA operating range

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest) Done

6431F Set ATA operating range to

longest range Done

644NN Set RF attenuation NN = 00 to 0A Done

64400 Set RF attenuation to 0 dB (full

power) Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-15

645NN Set eGo or eGo Plus operating

range NN = 00 (shortest) to

1F (longest)

Done

6451F Set eGo or eGo Plus operating

range to longest range Done

646XX Set IAG RF attenuation

XX = 00 to 0F Done

647XXX Select RF operating frequency

from 860 to 930 in 250 kHz steps

XXX = 000 to 118 (hexadecimal)

Done

648NN Set synchronization output delay

time NN = 01 to FF, where 01 = 1

ms and FF = 255 ms.

Done

64800 Disable synchronization output

delay Done

649NN Set synchronization hold-off time

NN = 01 to 0A, where 01 = 1 ms

and 0A = 10 ms.

Done

64900 Disable synchronization hold

off time Done

65 Reset power fail bit Done

66F Load default operating

parameters (except RF operating

frequency)

Done

67N

Set output pulse duration N = 0 to F



(4,8,12,16,20,24,32,40,48,60,76,

152, 228,300,376,752 ms)

Done

67C Output pulse duration set to

228 ms Done

6900 Disable presence without tag

reports Done

6901 Enable presence without tag

reports Done

6920 Turn RF off on timeout Done

6921 Turn RF off on timeout/tag Done

6922 Turn RF off on



timeout/no presence Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-16

693N Set RF timeout N = 0–F

(always expired, 4,8,12,20,24,

32,48,60,92,152, 300,452,

600,752, infinite)

Done

693F Set RF timeout to infinite Done

6940 Disable input inversion Done

6941 Enable input inversion Done

695S...S Set serial number



S...S = ASCII string



(maximum length of 6



characters)

Done

696S...S Store hardware



configuration string



S...S = ASCII string



(maximum length of 20



characters)

Done

697 Set user-programmable group

select equals (GSE) filter

697

MM AA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

where

MM = determines which of the

eight comparison data bytes are

to be compared for the Group

Select filter

AA = determines the start ad-

dress in the tag memory for the

comparison data

D...D = 8-byte field (16 charac-

ters) used by the tag as the com-

parison data for the group select

filter

Done

820 Disable input status change



reports Done

821 Report change on input0 Done

822 Report change on input1 Done

823 Report changes on both Done

830 Disable automatic periodic RF

status report Done

831 Enable automatic periodic RF

status report Done

Table D-2 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Numerically (continued)

Number Command Name Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-17

Alphabetical Command List

The following conventions are used in Table D-3:

•Items in bold italics identify factory default settings.

•Only the command-related data portion of the reader message is shown.

Refer to Chapter 7, “Commands for the complete syntax of commands and messages.

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically

Command Name Code Reader Message

All IDs transmit 40 Done

Alternate fifth group select

disable 494 Done

Alternate fifth group select enable 495 Done

Alternate fourth group select

disable 492 Done

Alternate fourth group select

enable 493 Done

Alternate group select disable 496 Done

Alternate group select enable 497 Done

Alternate second group select

disable 458 Done

Alternate second group select

enable 459 Done

Alternate third group select

disable 490 Done

Alternate third group select

enable 491 Done

Appended info status display 524 IDAP T1 D1 X0 

T0 = time not appended

T1 = time appended

D0 = date not appended

D1 = date appended

X0 = aux info not appended



X1 = aux info appended

ATA disable 480 Done

ATA enable 481 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.

Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-18

ATA operating range set

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest) 643NN Done

ATA operating range set to

longest range 6431F Done

Automatic periodic RF status

report disable 830 Done

Automatic periodic RF status

report enable 831 Done

Aux info append disable 310 Done

Aux info append enable 311 Done

Basic protocol select 610 Done

Baud rate = 1200 baud set 1002 Done

Baud rate = 19.2 K baud set 1006 Done

Baud rate = 2400 baud set 1003 Done

Baud rate = 38.4 K baud set 1007 Done

Baud rate = 4800 baud set 1004 Done

Baud rate = 9600 baud set 1005 Done

Boot checksum display 543 BCKS xxxx 

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

Buffered handshake report 577 XX = number of handshakes

Comm port parameters display 522 MAIN Bx Sx Px D0 

B0 = 110

B1 = 300

B2 = 1200

B3 = 2400

B4 = 4800

B5 = 9600

B6 = 19.2

B7 = 38.4

S0 = one stop bit

S1 = two stop bits

P0 = no parity

P1 = even

P2 = odd

D0 = EOL delay of 0 ms

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-19

Comm protocol display 525 ECPS Px Txx Xx S0 

P0 = basic

P1 = ECP

P2 = data inquiry

Txx = ECP timeout

ms = 50 * xx

TFF = disabled ECP timeout

X0 = no flow control

X1 = software flow control

X2 = hardware flow control

S0 = SOM character is #

Command mode switch 01 Done

Data inquiry protocol enable 613 Done

Data mode switch 00 Done

Date set 21 Done

Default operating parameters

load (except RF operating

frequency)

66F Done

Disable EAC page append 320 Done

DSP board Actel version display 513 DSP FPGA VER = XX.XX

eATA disable 488 Done

eATA enable 489 Done.

Echo disable 6170 Done

Echo enable 6171 Done

Echo status display 537 ECHO x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

ECP protocol select 611 Done

ECP timeout set

NN = 01–FE (1–255)

timeout = 50 ms * NN

(if NN = FF, timeout is disabled)

612NN Done

ECP timeout set to 12.7 sec 612FE Done

eGo disable 482 Done

eGo enable 483 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.

Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-20

eGo Plus operating range set

NN = 00 (shortest) to 1F (longest) 645NN Done

eGo or eGo Plus operating

range set to longest range 6451F Done

eGo or eGo Plus Tag

initialization during multi-tag

sort

456 Done

eGo or eGo Plus Tag initialization

during multi-tag sort disable 457 Done

Enable EAC page append 321 Done

Even parity select 1021 Done

Flash checksum display 540 PCKS I0000 Exxxx

xxxx = 4-byte ASCII checksum

Flow control disable 6140 Done

Hardware configuration

information display 506 S...S 

S...S = ASCII string

(maximum length of 

20 characters)

Hardware configuration string

store



S...S = ASCII string



(maximum length of 20

characters)

696S...S Done

Hardware flow control enable 6142 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-21

I/O status display 526 IOST Cx Ox Ix Dx

C0 = host controls outputs

C1 = predefined output mode

O0 = both outputs off

O1 = output0 on

O2 = output1 on

O3 = both outputs on

I0 = both inputs false

I1 = input0 true

I2 = input1 true

I3 = both inputs true

D0 - DF = output pulse duration

where

D0 = 4 ms

D1 = 8 ms

D2 = 12 ms

D3 = 16 ms

D4 = 20 ms

D5 = 24 ms

D6 = 32 ms

D7 = 40 ms

D8 = 48 ms

D9 = 60 ms

DA = 76 ms

DB = 152 ms

DC = 228 ms

DD = 300 ms

DE = 376 ms

DF = 752 ms

IAG disable 486 Done

IAG enable 487 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.

Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

IAG RF attenuation set

XX = 00 to 0F 646XX Done

Input inversion disable 6940 Done

Input inversion enable 6941 Done

Input status change display 560 SSTC Ex Mx 

E0 = status change reports

disabled

E1 = status change reports

enabled

M0 = no reporting

M1 = report change on input0

M2 = report change on input1

M3 = report change on either

input

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-22

Input0 change report 821 Done

Input1 change report 822 Done

Input status change reports

disable 820 Done

Multi-tag sort disable 454 Done

Multi-tag sort enable 455 Done

Odd parity select 1022 Done

Tag protocols display 570 ATA:<E, D> eGo:<I, F, D>

SeGo:<I, F, D> IAG:<E, D>

Sort:<E, D>

I = ID (64 bits)

E = Enabled

F = Full transaction (eATA)

D = Disabled

Output pulse duration set

N = 0–F

(4,8,12,16,20,24,32,40,48,60,76,

152, 228,300,376,752 ms)

67N Done

Output pulse duration set to

228 ms 67C Done

Output0 turn on 6201 Done

Output1 turn on 6202 Done

Outputs turn off both 6200 Done

Outputs turn on both 6203 Done

Parity disable 1020 Done

Power fail bit display 520 PWRB Px R0 

P0 = no power fail has occurred

P1 = power fail has occurred

R0 = not applicable

Power fail bit reset 65 Done

Predefined output mode select 621 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-23

Presence input status display 529 PRST Px D0 Ax Tx Ix

P0 = disable presence w/o tag

reports

P1 = enable presence w/o tag

reports

D0 = min presence true period 

of 0 ms

A0 = RF off on timeout

A1 = RF off on timeout or tag

A2 = RF off on timeout or no

presence

T0: RF timeout of 0 ms (always

expired)

T1: RF timeout of 4 ms

T2: RF timeout of 8 ms

T3: RF timeout of 12 ms

T4: RF timeout of 20 ms

T5: RF timeout of 24 ms

T6: RF timeout of 32 ms

T7: RF timeout of 48 ms

T8: RF timeout of 60 ms

T9: RF timeout of 92 ms

TA: RF timeout of 152 ms

TB: RF timeout of 300 ms

TC: RF timeout of 452 ms

TD: RF timeout of 600 ms

TE: RF timeout of 752 ms

TF: RF timeout infinite, never

expires (factory default)

I0 = Input inversion disabled

(factory default)

I1 = Input inversion enabled

Presence without tag reports

disable 6900 Done

Presence without tag reports

enable 6901 Done

Reader ID number display 521 RDID xx 

xx = 00–FF

Reader ID number set

NN = 00 to FF 60NN Done

Reader ID number set to 00 6000 Done

Reader reset 63 Model [model] 

Ver [version no.] SN [serial no.]

TransCore

Report changes both 823 Done

RF attenuation set NN = 00 to 0A 644NN Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-24

Set RF attenuation to 0 dB (full

power) 64400 Done

RF off on timeout 6920 Done

RF off on timeout/no presence 6922 Done

RF off on timeout/tag 6921 Done

RF turn off 6400 Done

RF turn on 6401 Done

RF on by input control 641 Done

RF operating frequency from 860

to 930 in 250 kHz steps select

XXX = 000 to 118 (hexadecimal)

647XXX Done

RF operating frequency select 642NN Done

RF status display 527 RFST Cx Ox Tx Fxxx Rxx Gxx

Axx Ixx

C0 = RF controlled by host

C1 = RF-by-presence sensor

O0 = RF off

O1 = RF on

T1 = uniqueness timeout of 2

min

T2 = uniqueness timeout of 15

sec

T3 = uniqueness timeout of 30

sec

Fxxx = RF output frequency,

xxx = 000 to 118

Rxx = Tag decoder range

(distance) for ATA tags, 00 to 1F

hexadecimal range value

Gxx = Tag decoder range

(distance) for eGo Plus Tags, 00

to 1F hexadecimal range value

Axx = RF power attenuation, 00

max to 0A min (10 dB less than

max)

Ixx = IAG RF power attenuation,

00 max to 0F min (15 dB less

than max)

If you enter RF settings using

command #642NN, the display

command for RF output

frequency, F is "Fxx" and

indicates use of the backward-

compatible frequency entry

method.

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-25

RF timeout set N = 0 to F

(always expired, 4,8,12,20,24,32,

48,60,92,152,300,452,600,752

ms, infinite)

693N Done

RF timeout set to infinite 693F Done

RF transceiver FPGA version

display 510 RF FPGA VER = XX.XX

RF transceiver I filter chip version

display 511 FIL IC I VER = XX.XX

RF transceiver Q filter chip

version display 512 FIL IC Q VER = XX.XX

RF0 filter status display 530 RF0S Ux Vx 

U0 = one ID separation

U1 = two ID separations

U2 = three ID separations

U3 = four ID separations

U4 = transmit all IDs

V0 = valid ID code criteria of one

acquisition (fixed)

V1 = valid ID code criteria of two

acquisitions

V2 = valid ID code criteria of

three acquisitions

V3 = valid ID code criteria of four

acquisitions

SeGo disable 484 Done

SeGo enable 485 Done if Encompass 4 Reader

model supports this tag protocol.

Error if tag protocol is

unsupported.

Serial number set



S...S = ASCII string



(maximum length of 6

characters)

695S...S Done

Software flow control enable 6141 Done

Stop bit use one 1010 Done

Stop bit use two 1011 Done

Synchronization hold off time

disable 64900 Done

Synchronization hold-off time set

NN = 01 to 0A, where 01 = 1 ms

and 0A = 10 ms.

649NN Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-26

Synchronization output delay

time disable 64800 Done

Synchronization output delay time

set NN = 01 to FF, where 01 = 1

ms and FF = 255 ms.

648NN Done

Synchronization values display 582

SYNC T<00 to FF> H<00 to 0A>

Tag ID separation select four 4103 Done

Tag ID separation select one 4100 Done

Tag ID separation select three 4102 Done

Tag ID separation select two 4101 Done

Tag translation mode status

display 534 TT <0 to 1>



0 = tag translation mode

disabled

1 = tag translation mode enabled

Time and date appended 302 Done

Time and date display 22 Time and date

Time and date not appended 300 Done

Time set 20 Done

Translation mode disabled 452 Done

Uniqueness reset 440 Done

Uniqueness timeout set to 2

minutes 441 Done

Uniqueness timeout set to 15

seconds 442 Done

Uniqueness timeout set to 30

seconds 443 Done

User-programmable group select

equals (GSE) filter data display 549 The response data is formatted

similar to the data in the

configuration command.

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Command Quick Reference

D-27

User-programmable group se-

lect equals (GSE) filter set

697

MM AA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

where

MM = determines which of the

eight comparison data bytes are

to be compared for the Group

Select filter

AA = determines the start ad-

dress in the tag memory for the

comparison data

D...D = 8-byte field (16 charac-

ters) used by the tag as the com-

parison data for the group select

filter

697 Done

Valid ID code select four 4203 Done

Valid ID code select one 4200 Done

Valid ID code select three 4202 Done

Valid ID code select two 4201 Done

Version display 505 Model [model] 

Ver [ver no.] SN [serial no.]

Wiegand mode disable 450 Done

Wiegand mode enable 451 Done

Wiegand mode status display 532 T0F x

0 = disabled

1 = enabled

Wiegand retransmit interval

display 533 WTI xx 

xx = 01–FF seconds

Wiegand retransmit interval set

NN = 01 to FF seconds 46NN Done

Wiegand retransmit interval set

to 1 second 4601 Done

Table D-3 Encompass 4 Reader Commands Listed Alphabetically (continued)

Command Name Code Reader Message

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

D-28

-1

Compatible Tag Information

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

-2

Compatible Tag Information

E-3

Appendix E

Compatible Tag Information

This appendix gives helpful information about the tags that are

compatible with the Encompass® 4 Reader.

Tag Configurations

Table E-1 lists the TransCore Super eGo® (SeGo) protocol tags that are compatible

with the Encompass 4 Reader.

Table E-1 SeGo Protocol Tags

Tag Tag Type Power

Source

Number

of 6-bit ASCII

Charactersa

Number

of 128-Bit

Framesa

Number

Wiegand

Bits

Special

Features

eGo Plus

Sticker Tag

Toll, electronic

vehicle

registration

(EVR), parking,

security access

Beam

20 1NA Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination

10 1/2 26 to 54

eGo Plus

Security

Sticker Tag

20 1NA Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination,

tamper

detection

10 1/2 26 to 54

eGo Plus

License Plate

Tag

20 1NA Water-

resistant,

exterior-

mounted

10 1/2 26 to 54

a. These fields apply to eATA-programmed tags only. Contact TransCore for information regarding

tags programmed with these features.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

E-4

Table E-2 lists the Intellitag-programmed tags that are compatible with the

Encompass 4 Reader.

Table E-3 lists most ATA tag models that are compatible with the Encompass 4

Reader.

Table E-2 eGo Protocol Tags

Tag Tag Type Power

Source

Number

of 6-bit ASCII

Characters

Number

of 128-Bit

Frames

Number

Wiegand

Bits

Special

Features

Windshield

Sticker Tag Toll, EVR,

parking,

security access Beam

20 1NA Very thin,

flexible,

multi-layer

lamination

10 1/2 26 to 54

License Plate

Tag

20 1NA Water-

resistant,

exterior-

mounted

10 1/2 26 to 54

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags

Tag Model

Number TagType Power

Source

Number

of 6-Bit

ASCII

Characters

Number of

128-Bit

Frames

Number of

Wiegand Bits Special

Features

AT5100 Toll Beam 20 1N/A 915 MHz, thin

case, non-metal

window install

AT5102 Access

control Beam 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz, thin

case, non-metal

window install

AT5105 Access

control 5-yr

battery 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

thin case, non-

metal window

install

AT5106 Access

control 10-yr

battery 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

sealed case,

non-metal

window install

or non-metal

external install

AT5107 Access

control 10-yr

battery 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

sealed case,

metal external

install

Compatible Tag Information

E-5

AT5110 Trans-

portation Beam 20 1N/A 915 MHz

frequency,

metal external

install

AT5112 Access

control,

transpor-

tation

Beam 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz

frequency,

metal external

install

AT5114 Access

control,

transpor-

tation

10-yr

battery 10 1/2 26 to 54 Multifrequency,

metal external

install

AT5125 Trans-

portation Beam 20 1N/A 915 MHz

frequency;

high-

temperature

chemical-

resistant case,

metal external

install

AT5140 Toll 10-yr

battery 20 1N/A 915 MHz

frequency,

license plate

install

AT5145 Toll Beam 20 1N/A 915 MHz

frequency,

license plate

install

AT5146 Access

control Beam 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz,

license plate

install

AT5147 Access

control 10-yr

battery 10 1/2 26 to 54 915 MHz,

license plate

install

AT5510 Trans-

portation 10-yr

battery 20 1N/A Multifrequency,

metal external

install

AT5544 Toll 10-yr

battery 20 1N/A Multifrequency,

sealed case,

non-metal

window or

external install

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags (continued)

Tag Model

Number TagType Power

Source

Number

of 6-Bit

ASCII

Characters

Number of

128-Bit

Frames

Number of

Wiegand Bits Special

Features

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

E-6

a. If desired, in place of 40 six-bit ASCII characters, the AT5707 can support

up to 34 seven-bit ASCII characters.

Tag Data Formats

Tags are programmed at the TransCore factory with the tag model number, date of

manufacture, and data format. Contact TransCore for special order entry procedures

for the format that applies to your system. The following four tag data formats can be

used:

•10-character alphanumeric ASCII — Four alphanumeric characters are fixed and

can be used to identify either the dealer or the user. The remaining six positions

are numeric and should be unique for each tag issued. For example, the entry

ACME000001 might be specified as the first tag on the order entry form from

ACME Parking Garage.

•20-character alphanumeric ASCII — Four alphanumeric characters are typically

fixed and the remaining 16 positions are numbered sequentially.

•Wiegand — Tags can be programmed in Wiegand formats with 26 to 54 bits. If

you choose this format, complete a Wiegand format worksheet — attached to the

order entry form — indicating the data to be programmed into the tags.

Note: Security access control tag models can be Wiegand-formatted. SeeTable E-1

through Table E-3 for Wiegand-compatible tag models.

AT5545 Toll 10-yr

battery 20 1N/A Multifrequency,

sealed case,

metal external

install

AT5547 Toll 5-yr

battery 20 1N/A Multifrequency,

thin case, non-

metal window

install

AT5704 Trans-

portation External 4608 256 N/A Multifrequency,

dynamic tag,

metal external

install

AT5707 Trans-

portation 8-yr

battery 40a2N/A 915 MHz

frequency,

dynamic tag,

metal external

install

Table E-3 ATA Protocol Tags (continued)

Tag Model

Number TagType Power

Source

Number

of 6-Bit

ASCII

Characters

Number of

128-Bit

Frames

Number of

Wiegand Bits Special

Features

Compatible Tag Information

E-7

•AAR/ISO — For requirements for this format, refer to ISO 10374 and the most

recent version of Association of American Railroads Standard for Automatic

Equipment Identification.

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

E-8

AA3100 Yagi 8

AA3101 Yagi 9

AA3110 Parapanel 9

AA3140 PCB Log Periodic 9

AA3152 Universal Toll Antenna 9

AA3153 Toll Antenna 10

AC power 9

ACK/NAK response 6

alignment

antenna and tag 10

reader and tag 4

American Trucking Associations 3

ANS NCITS 256-2001 3

antenna

mounting 23

selection 8

antenna interface 22

antenna mounting

curb-side 25

anti-pass back 11

append

auxiliary information 9

append information commands 8–10

appended information

status 20

appended tag data 13

ASCII terminals 3

assignments

colored-wire pair for RS–232 12, 31

pin 11, 29

asynchronous message/command message collision 15

ATA 3

operating range 38

audible circuit tester 5

audience, system guide 3

automatic periodic RF status report 50

auxiliary information 9

auxiliary reader control commands 50

basic protocol 31

baud rate 6

blind rivet installation 26

boot checksum 29

boot failure message 6

bracket

factory-mounted 16

pole mount 16

wall mount 19

buffer

tag/message 7

buffered handshakes 30

bumper types 25

buzz box

See audible circuit tester

cable

length 19

power and communications 17

power extension 18

cable length 17

cabling accessory kits 17

center island 14

coaxial cable performance 22

COM 1 properties dialog box 7

command entry conventions 3

Command Group 0

See reader mode control commands

Command Group 1

See communication port control commands

Command Group 2

See real-time clock commands

Command Group 3

See append information commands

Command Group 4

See ID filtering commands

Command Group 5

See reader status commands

Command Group 6

See reader control function commands

Command Group 8

See auxiliary reader control commands

command mode 4, 5

host transmission formats 7

sample messages 10

switch to 7

command response conventions 4

commands, list of 5–50

communication protocols 3

communications

verifying 8

communications interfaces 19

RS–232 21

Wiegand 21

communications port control commands 5–7

communications port parameters 20

communications protocol 19

status 21, 22

communications protocols

basic protocol 4

basic protocol command response 9

basic protocol reader transmission 5

ECP host response 5

error correcting protocol 4

error correcting protocol format 5

communications requirements 17

communications cables

host

Encompass 4 Reader System Guide

computer cables 23

configuration label 3

configuration labeling 3

configuring

appended tag data 13

communications protocol 19

ID separation 13

parameters 12–19

port communication parameters 18

radio frequency 15

reports 13

reset reader 14

RF transmission 15

continuous 16

host controlling 16

vehicle detector controlling 15

sense inputs 17

sense output devices 17

serial port communications 18

configuring the Encompass 4 Reader 3–21

connecting

AC power 9

colored-wire pair cable 12, 31

colored-wire pair cable for RS–422 32

colored-wire pair cable for Wiegand 33

communications 29

bench testing 10

required materials 10, 29

DC power 10

Encompass 4 Reader to the PC 29

power supply 28

reader to PC 29

RS–232 interface 11, 29

RS–422 interface 13, 32

sense input circuits 34

sense output circuits 36

Wiegand interface 33

connecting sense input 34

connecting sense output 34

connection description dialog box 6

conventions

typographical 5

CRC

See cyclic redundancy check

CRC calculation 16–19

current, standby operating 18

current, worst case maximum 18

cyclic redundancy check 4

data inquiry protocol 32

data mode 3, 5

date

set 8

DB25 connector 11, 30

DB9 connector 11, 30

DC power supply 10

default operating parameters 42

default parameters 4

disable

ATA 16

automatic periodic RF status report 50

eATA 16

echo mode 33

eGo 16

eGo Plus Tag initialization during multi-tag sort 14

eGo tag initialization 14

fifth alternate group select 17

fifth alternative group select 17

fourth alternate group select 17

IAG 16

multi-tag sort 14

second alternate group select 15

SeGo 16

tag translation mode 13

third alternate group select 17

Wiegand mode 13

Discharging voltage

procedure 6, 23

required equipment 6, 23

display

appended information status 20

boot checksum 29

communications port parameters 20

communications protocol status 21, 22

DSP board Actel version 19

echo status 28

flash checksum 29

hardware configuration information 19

input status change report options 29

operating mode status 30

power fail bit 19

presence input status 25

reader ID number 19

RF status 24

RF transceiver FPGA version 19

RF transceiver I filter chip version 19

RF transceiver Q filter chip version 19

RF0 filter status 27

software version 18

Wiegand mode status 28

Wiegand retransmit interval 28

display tag translation mode status 28

display time and date 8

download mode 4

dry contact closure 22

DSP board Actel version 19

dual-protocol 3

echo mode 33

echo status 28

ECP

reliability 16

timeout 12

TransCore 0596465PT90 Location Monitoring Services Transmitter User Manual 412066 012 E4 SG

TransCore Location Monitoring Services Transmitter 412066 012 E4 SG

User Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation